365 312 847R6 0 PDF

See notice on first page.
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal

(Formerly Metropolis AMU)
Release 1.0 through 6.0
Applications and Planning Guide
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is
not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable
agreements.
365-312-847R6.0
CC109686907
ISSUE 1
MARCH 2009
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by
anyone outside Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Notice
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However,
information is subject to change.
Release notification
This document describes 1655 AMU Release 6.0 and covers previous releases.
Compared to provided descriptions some of the legacy releases may vary due to the feature upgrades.
Declaration of Conformity
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) for this product can be found in this document at Conformity statements (p. 5-4).
WEEE directive
The Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive for this product can be found in this document at Eco-environmental
statements (p. 5-5).
Ordering information
The order number of this document is 365-312-847R6.0 (Issue 1).

Technical support
For information about Technical Support, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent Local/Regional Technical Support Service Representative or visit
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support.
License information for Open Source software
1655 AMU software contains open source software. For further details about handling/usage and licensing of the contained/used open source
software, please check 1655 AMUopen source declaration files which are available on the 1655 AMU SW CD-ROMs.
Information product support
To comment on this information product, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or email your
comments to the Comments Hotline (comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
Contents
About this document

Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................
ix
Safety information
......................................................................................................................................................................
xv
Intended audience
.....................................................................................................................................................................
xvi
Reason for revision
How to use this information product

Conventions used
Related training
.........................................................................................................................................................
xviii
xix
xix
..............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical safety
...............................................................................................................................................................................
Technical Documentation
How to order
xx
xx
....................................................................................................................................................
xxiii
............................................................................................................................................................................
xxiii
How to comment
....................................................................................................................................................................
xxiii
Introduction
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
System overview
1-1
..............................................................................................................................................
1-1
.......................................................................................................................................................................
1-3
Structure of safety statements
xvii
..........................................................................................................................................................................
Software Release Description

Intended use
xvi
................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................................
Related documentation
ix
Product description
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
2-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
iii
Issue 1 March 2009
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System architecture
Introduction
.................................................................................................................................................................................
2-3
Hardware overview of the 1655 AMU

Introduction
.................................................................................................................................................................................
Street cabinet versions

Fan unit
2-7
.........................................................................................................................................................
2-19
......................................................................................................................................................................................
2-21
Option cards
Introduction
...............................................................................................................................................................................
2-25
PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards
.......................................................................................................................
2-25
.......................................................................................................................
2-26
.........................................................................................................................................................
2-26
EPL4_E14 option card
............................................................................
2-29
.......................................................................................................................................................
2-32
................................................................................................................................................................
2-40
EPL4_E132 (120) and EPL4_E132_75 (75) option cards

ESW4_E14 option card
Sl-14/8 option card
.........................................................................
2-41
............................................................................................................................................
2-42
Adapter card for legacy option cards (for 2m/4o version only)
PI-E3DS3/3_E14 option card
.........................................................................................................
2-44
..............................................................................................................................................................
2-48
EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards

Legacy option cards
Technical specifications
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................
System specifications
..........................................................................................................................................................
Performance monitoring
......................................................................................................................................................
Advanced TransLAN Features

3
......................................................................................................................................
2-52
2-52
2-74
2-81
Features
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
3-1
Physical interfaces
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission interfaces
..........................................................................................................................................................
3-3
3-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
iv
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data interfaces
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Timing interfaces
......................................................................................................................................................................
3-5
3-5
Orderwire interfaces
................................................................................................................................................................
3-6
Operations interfaces
...............................................................................................................................................................
3-6
........................................................................................................................................................................
3-7
Power interfaces
Transmission features
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
Cross-connection features
Transmission protection
......................................................................................................................................................
3-9
3-9
.......................................................................................................................................................
3-10
............................................................................................................................................................
3-12
Ethernet features
.....................................................................................................................................................................
3-12
Auto-negotiation
.....................................................................................................................................................................
3-14
Equipment protection
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)

Link Pass Through (LPT)
...............................................................................................................
3-15
...................................................................................................................................................
3-16
.................................................................................................................................................
3-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................
3-19
Ethernet mapping schemes

Equipment features
Overview
Equipment inventory and reports
....................................................................................................................................
3-19
......................................................................................................
3-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring (DDM) of SFPs

Synchronization and timing
Overview
Timing features
.......................................................................................................................................................................
Timing interface features
....................................................................................................................................................
3-22
3-22
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote maintenance, management, and control
3-24
.......................................................................................................
3-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28
Alarm severity assignment profile

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
v
Issue 1 March 2009
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Planning Network Applications

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
4-1
Planning network application options

Planning considerations 1655 AMU
.................................................................................................................................
4-2
...................................................................................................................................................................
4-4
Network topologies
Linear applications
Folded ring application

Ring application
...........................................................................................................................................................
4-5
........................................................................................................................................................................
4-6
Dual-homed ring application
................................................................................................................................................
4-7
Linear extension application
................................................................................................................................................
4-7
......................................................................................................................................................................
4-8
Dual ring closure
Multiple ring application

Hub application
.......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................
Full capacity ring interconnection
...................................................................................................................................
4-11
4-12
...........................................................................................................................................................
4-12
.........................................................................................................
4-13
......................................................................................................................................................
4-14
IP Tunneling in the DCC channels application

GSM/UMTS application
Multi-service application with the TransLAN option board

Point-to-point LAN connection
5
4-10
...........................................................................................................................
1655 AMU typical 1m/1o application

Grooming application
4-9
..............................................................................
4-14
........................................................................................................................................
4-18
Quality and reliability

Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
5-1
......................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2
Quality
Overview
...........................................................................................
5-2
........................................................................................................................................................................
5-3
Alcatel-Lucents commitment to quality and reliability

Ensuring quality
Conformity statements
............................................................................................................................................................
5-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
vi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability specifications
Overview
......................................................................................................................................................................................
General specifications
Reliability program
.............................................................................................................................................................
5-7
.................................................................................................................................................................
5-8
6
......................................................................................................................................................
5-8
......................................................................................................................................................................................
6-1
Product support
Overview
Installation services
..................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
6-3
Maintenance services
..............................................................................................................................................................
6-5
......................................................................................................................................................................
6-7
...........................................................................................................................................................
6-8
........................................................................................................................................................................
6-8
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
6-9
Documentation support
Training support
Warranty
...........................................................................................................................................................................
6-9
......................................................................................................................................................................................
7-1
Standard repair
Ordering
Overview
A
6-1
Engineering services
Technical support
5-7
...............................................................................................................................................................
7-1
.....................................................................................................................................................................................
A-1
An SDH overview
Overview
SDH signal hierarchy
.............................................................................................................................................................
SDH path and line sections

SDH frame structure
.................................................................................................................................................
A-4
..............................................................................................................................................................
A-7
SDH digital multiplexing

SDH interface
A-3
....................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................
SDH multiplexing process
.................................................................................................................................................
SDH demultiplexing process
............................................................................................................................................
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
vii
Issue 1 March 2009
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH transport rates
..............................................................................................................................................................
A-12
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
viii
About this document

About this document
Purpose
This Application and Planning Guide (APG) provides the following information about
the 1655 AMU, Release 1.0 through 6.0:
System overview
Product description
Features
Planning network applications
Product support
Ordering.
Reason for revision
This is the first issue of this guide for 1655 AMU Release 1.0 through 6.0.
The following table lists previous release versions and their corresponding features.
Release
GA
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
ix
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1.0
August 2004
The following features have been

provided in this release.
One shelf variant with two main and

four option card slots and one shelf
variant with one main and one option
card slot
One main unit with pluggable line

interfaces for two STM-1 or two
STM-4; supports two extra STM-1
interfaces
Double width adapter card support for

legacy option cards; LAN board
optimized for Ethernet Private Line
(X8PL - Option card Ethernet Private
Line 8 x E/FE interfaces) cards with
LCAS
63 x E1 with RJ45 connectors (120

/75 )
1 + 1 MSP protection on STM-1/4

interfaces
DCC for Network Element

management
Supports cross-connection between

tributary and aggregate interfaces;
non-blocking LO connectivity
MSP Performance Monitoring only
Local and remote software

downloading
Supports centralized alarm

management using Wavestar
ITM-CIT
Supports remote alarm investigation

through Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs
(MDI) and Miscellaneous Discrete
Outputs (MDO)
Cross-connect loopbacks for electrical

interfaces
2 Mbit/s external synchronization

clock
Space efficient design for rack

mounting
Supported by the Wavestar

ITM-CIT - Release 13.02 and
Wavestar ITM-SC Release 11.3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2.0
February 2005

Additional pluggable STM1e
Additional legacy card support:

4 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(X4IP)
16 x DS1
2 x E3
2 x DS3
Main board protection,

VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 SNC/N protection
Performance Monitoring for

VC-12/VC-3/VC-4, PDH 2Mbit/s
frames, and AIS detection
VPN tagging and provisionable

Ethertype
Double tagging on LAN ports
Customer WAN port operation mode
Increased IEEE VLAN instances
Ethernet Private Line option card

with 2 E/FE (TX), 2 E/FE/GE
(TX/optical SFP), 4 E1 (75/120 )
Pluggable GE for SX, LX, and ZX
Ethernet Private Line option card

with 4 E/FE (TX), 32 x E1 (75 )
External AC/DC power converter
Supported by Wavestar ITM-CIT Release 14.0, Wavestar ITM-SC,

Release 11.4, Lucent Network
Management System (NMS), Release
8.2, Lucent Optical Management
System (OMS), Release 3.2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xi
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2.1
September 2006

Bidirectional performance monitoring

for midway points and connection
termination points
AU-4 Non-intrusive bidirectional

monitoring
TU-12, TU-3, Near-end non-intrusive

monitoring
Note: These features can only be

managed by the ITM-SC and the Lucent
OMS Release 5.0.2. For ITM-SC users,
these features are only applicable to 1655
AMU Release 2.1 and do not include
features from subsequent releases.
Note: For ITM-CIT users, the 1655 AMU
Release 2.1 provides network element
software via the Fast Download Tool
(FDT). For more information, refer the
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU
Installation Guide.
3.0
January 2006

Switched Ethernet option card with 2

x E/FE, 2 x E/FE/GE, and 4 E1
interfaces (75/120 )
Option card for 8 x STM-1 or 2 x

STM-4
Link Pass Through (LPT) on

EPL4_E14 - Release 2.0,
EPL4_E132_75 - Release 2.0,
ESW4_E14 - Release 3.0 option cards
Supported by the Lucent OMS

Release 4.2 and Wavestar ITM-CIT
- Release 16.0.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
xii
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4.0
4.1
August 2006
February 2007

provided in this release:
Main unit - 2 STM-1/4 and 2

STM-4/16 interfaces using SFPs
STM-16 SFPs
Performance Monitoring features

The following performance
monitoring features have been
implemented in this release.
General Purpose Ethernet Monitor
Ethernet Service Monitor
Ethernet Congestion Monitor
Ethernet High Priority Traffic
Monitor
Ethernet Low Priority Traffic
Monitor
Ethernet Frame Delay Monitor.
Advanced TransLAN features for

the ESW4_E14 option card.

Release 5.0 and Wavestar ITM-CIT
- Release 17.0

Introduced support for Ethernet PL

and E1 - 4 E/FE and 32 E1 (120 ) EPL4_E132 option card
VC-4-4c cross connection
Outloops on Ethernet ports
Alarm severity assignment profiles

(ASAP) support
Performance Monitoring features
Supports features from 1655 AMU

Release 2.1

Release 5.0.2 and Wavestar
ITM-CIT - Release 18.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xiii
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5.0
March 2008

3 E3/DS3 plus 4 E1 card
Main unit with 1 pluggable

STM-4/16 line dual rate interfaces
[ASC114]
support for cascaded SNC/N

protection : LO/LO, HO/HO
Support for inband E1 management

channel
MIB upload/download (Web GUI)
Two new street cabinet shelves
2H Shelf
1 main and 1 option slot
Horizontal [ASH112]
Integrated fan [ASF102]
6H Shelf
2 main and 4 option slots
Horizontal [ASH111]
Integrated fan [ASF101]
Street cabinet shelves with the following

features:
Extended temperature operation
Up to 50% size reduction in CO

application
Horizontal mounting
Fully managed fan solution
Right or left airflow direction

selectable at installation
Integrated mounting brackets
TransLAN features:
GUI adapt. for 802.1ag OAM (CC,

LB)
Layer 2 MAC Access Control List
CFI p-bit swapping on NR ports
TPID swapping on NR ports
IEEE 802.3ah OAM (EFM)
Link Aggregation Groups with LACP
p0-bit override on Egress Customer

Ports
OMS/CIT features
ITM-CIT support for Windows Vista

Operating system
OMS R6.3.2 support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
xiv
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6.0
March 2009

Support for Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH)
option cards:
Quad E/FE/GbE switched Ethernet

card with Ethernet over PDH support
and 32 E1 interfaces 120
(ASC112)
Quad E/FE/GbE switched Ethernet

card with Ethernet over PDH support
and 32 E1 interfaces 75
(ASC113)
inter-working with TSS-3
64 E1 signal termination capacity
16 VCGs, E1-xv, x =1..16
32 E1 interfaces on unit
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring

(DDM) on SFPs
PDH performance monitoring on E1

in accordance to G.704
TransLAN features:
GFP-FCS support for P12s-Xv in

GFP-F mapping
Support for 16k MAC addresses
Manual STP timer provisioning
Retrieval of additional STP

information
Flexible traffic class to queue

assignment
OMS/CIT features:
1350 OMS R9.1.1 support
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given
at points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist.
Failure to follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious
consequences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xv
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intended audience
The 1655 AMU Applications and Planning Guide is primarily intended for network
planners and engineers. In addition, others who need specific information about the
features, applications, operation, and engineering of 1655 AMU may find the
information in this manual useful.
How to use this information product
Each chapter of this manual treats a specific aspect of the system and can be regarded
as an independent description. This ensures that readers can inform themselves
according to their special needs. This also means that the manual provides more
information than needed by many of the readers. Before you start reading the manual,
it is therefore necessary to assess which aspects or chapters will cover the individual
area of interest.
The following table briefly describes the information presented in each chapter.
Chapter
Title
About this information product
Introduction
Product description
Features
Planning network
applications
Description
This chapter
describes the guides purpose, intended audience,

and organization
lists related documentation
explains how to comment on this document
This chapter
presents a structure of hazard statements
provides a high-level product overview
provides an overview of key features
This chapter
presents the network element overview
describes the system architecture
describes supported option cards
lists technical specifications
This chapter
describes the features of the 1655 AMU
describes operations, administration, maintenance,

and provisioning functions (such as alarms,
operation interfaces, security, and performance
monitoring)
This chapter
presents general application options
recommends network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
xvi
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Chapter
Title
Description
This chapter
Product support
provides the Alcatel-Lucent quality policy
lists the reliability specifications
This chapter
describes engineering and installation services
explains documentation and technical support
lists training courses
Ordering
Describes how to order 1655 AMU
Appendix A
SDH Overview
Describes the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

standards for optical signal rates and formats
Glossary
Defines telecommunication terms and explains abbreviations and acronyms
Index
Lists specific subjects and their corresponding page numbers
Conventions used
These conventions are used in this document:

Numbering
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numbering
restarts at 1 in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, the
page numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third
page in chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with those used for numbering, i.e. the first
number in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specific
text passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicate
the contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.
Typographical conventions
Special typographical conventions apply to elements of the graphical user interface

(GUI), file names and system path information, keyboard entries, alarm messages etc.
Elements of the graphical user interface (GUI)

These are examples of text that appears on a graphical user interface (GUI), such
as menu options, window titles or push buttons:
Provision{, Delete, Apply, Close, OK (push-button)
Provision Timing/Sync (window title)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xvii
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View Equipment Details{ (menu option)

Administration Security User Provisioning{ (path for invoking a
window)
File names and system path information

These are examples of file names and system path information:
setup.exe
C:\Program Files\Alcatel-Lucent
Keyboard entries
These are examples of keyboard entries:
F1, Esc X, Alt-F, Ctrl-D, Ctrl-Alt-Del (simple keyboard entries)
A hyphen between two keys means that both keys have to be pressed
simultaneously. Otherwise, a single key has to be pressed, or several keys have
to be pressed in sequence.
copy abc xyz (command)
A complete command has to be entered.
Alarms and error messages
These are examples of alarms and error messages:
Loss of Signal
Circuit Pack Failure

HP-UNEQ, MS-AIS, LOS, LOF
Not enough disk space available
Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the Glossary unless it can be
assumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.
Related documentation
This section briefly describes the documents that are included in the 1655 AMU
documentation set.
Installation Guide
The 1655 AMU Installation Guide (IG) provides step-by-step instructions for
system installation and setup. It includes information needed for pre-installation site
planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Applications and Planning Guide

The 1655 AMU Applications and Planning Guide (APG) provides recommendations
for network planners, analysts, and managers. It is also used by the Alcatel-Lucent
Account Team. It presents a detailed overview of the system, recommends
applications, provides planning requirements, engineering rules, ordering
information, and technical specifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
xviii
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Operations Guide

The 1655 AMU User Operations Guide (UOG) provides step-by-step instructions to
perform routine system operations such as system provisioning, operations, and
administrative tasks using the ITM Craft Interface Terminal (ITM-CIT).
Alarm Messages and Trouble Clearing Guide

The 1655 AMU Alarm Messages and Trouble Clearing Guide (AMTCG) provides a
detailed description of alarm messages. It includes procedures for routine
maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and component replacement.
The following table lists the documents included in the 1655 AMU documentation set.
Document title
Document code
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Applications and

Planning Guide Release 1.0 through 6.0
109686907
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User Operations

Guide Release 1.0 through 6.0
109686949
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Alarm Messages and

Trouble Clearing Guide 1.0 through 6.0
109686915
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Installation Guide 1.0

through 6.0
109686931
CD-ROM Documentation R6.0 1655 Access Multiplexer

Universal (all manuals on a CD-ROM)
109686923
(365-312-847R6.0)
(365-312-850R6.0)
(365-312-849R6.0)
(365-312-848R6.0)
(365-312-853R6.0)
These documents can be ordered or downloaded from the Customer Information Center
(CIC) at http://www.cic.alcatel-lucent.com/documents.html or via your Local Customer
Support.
Related training
For detailed information about the 1655 AMU training courses and how to register,
please refer to Training support (p. 6-8) in this document.
Software Release Description
The Software Release Description (SRD) provides a description of the Network

Element software upgrades and is also available with the 1655 AMU CD-ROM. This
manual describes 1655 AMU Release 1.0 through 6.0. For technical reasons, some of
the documented features may not be available until later software versions. For precise
information about the availability of features, please consult the Software Release
Description (SRD) that is distributed with the network element software. This
information provides the actual product status at the time of software delivery.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xix
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Intended use
This equipment shall be used only in accordance with intended use, corresponding
installation, and maintenance statements as specified in this documentation. Any other
use or modification is prohibited.
Optical safety
For a detailed description about Optical safety guidelines, refer the 1655 Access
Multiplexer Universal AMU Safety Guide.
IEC Customer Laser Safety Guidelines
Alcatel-Lucent declares that this product is compliant with all essential safety
requirements as stated in IEC 60825-Part 1 and 2 Safety of Laser Products and
Safety of Optical Fibre Telecommunication Systems. Futhermore, Alcatel-Lucent
declares that the warning statements on equipment labels are in accordance with the
specified laser radiation class.
Optical Safety Declaration (if laser modules used)
Alcatel-Lucent declares that this product is compliant with all essential safety
requirements as stated in IEC 60825-Part 1 and 2 Safety of Laser Products and
Safety of Optical Fiber Telecommunication Systems. Furthermore, Alcatel-Lucent
declares that the warning statements on equipment labels are in accordance with the
specified laser radiation class.
Optical Fiber Communications
This equipment contains an Optical Fiber Communications semiconductor laser/LED

transmitter. The following Laser Safety Guidelines are provided for this product.
General Laser Information
Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar
operating systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at
wavelengths between approximately 800 nanometers (nm) and 1600 nm. The emitted
light is above the red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the
human eye. Although the radiant end at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated
invisible, some people can see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels that
are several orders of magnitude below any levels that have been shown to cause injury
to the eye.
Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. The term
monochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be
visible or invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-size beam of
light, and because the beam size is small the power density (also called irradiance) is
very high. Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable
state regulations, as well as international standards, for their safe operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
xx
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well
collimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over
distance. However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence,
typically 10 to 20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the
distance reduces the irradiance by a factor of 4) and rapidly decreases over distance.
Lasers and Eye Damage
The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400-1400 nm range
may cause eye damage if absorbed by the retina. When a beam of light enters the eye,
the eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The
irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105, or 100,000 times
more than at the cornea and, if sufficiently intense, may cause a retinal burn.
The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in an optical fiber telecommunications
is thermal in origin, i.e., damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount of
energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the
retina occurs only when one looks at the light long enough that the product of the
retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies
above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns, but do not affect the retina. The
thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly higher than
for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region.
Classification of Lasers
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the U.S. are regulated by the Food and
Drug Administrations Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) under
21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser
product as belonging to one of four major Classes: I, II, lla, IlIa, lllb, or IV. The
International Electro-technical Commission is an international standards body that
writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar with
Classes divided into Classes 1, 1M, 2, 2M, 3R, 3B, and 4. Lasers are classified
according to the accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1 because,
under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are
terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath
forming a protective housing. Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically
installed in front of the laser circuit pack shelves The circuit packs themselves,
however, may be FDA/CDRH Class I, IIIb, or IV or IEC Class 1, 1M, 3R, 3B, or 4.
Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber Telecommunication Systems
In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totally

enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA and
IEC classifications.
The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber
telecommunication system can disconnect or break, and may expose people to laser
emissions. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose the
technician to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing.
Unlike more familiar laser devices such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xxi
Issue 1 March 2009
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pattern of a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent

beam, the irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the
distance, the less energy will enter the eye, and the less potential risk for eye injury.
Inadvertently viewing an un-terminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at
distances greater than 5 to 6 inches normally will not cause eye injury, provided the
power in the fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a few
tens of milliwatts at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur if an optical
instrument such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to stare at the
energized fiber end.
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Laser Safety Precautions for Enclosed Systems
Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are

completely enclosed; nonetheless, the following precautions shall be observed:
1. Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should not stare into optical
connectors or broken fibers
2. Under no circumstance shall laser/fiber optic operations be performed by a
technician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course
3. Since viewing laser emissions directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical
instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage,
appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in close proximity to the optical port
on the protective housing/access panel of the terminal equipment.
Laser Safety Precautions for Unenclosed Systems
During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system

is considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices:
1. Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance
and restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from un-terminated, energized
optical connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the optical
ports of laser circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposure
distance. Optical port shutters, Automatic Power Reduction (APR), and
Automatic Power Shut Down (APSD) are engineering controls that are also used to
limit emissions. However, technicians removing or replacing laser circuit packs
should not stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or
magnifying lenses. (Normal eye wear or indirect viewing instruments such as
Find-R-Scopes are not considered magnifying lenses or optical instruments.)
2. Only authorized, trained personnel shall use optical test equipment during
installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers (Some
examples of optical test equipment are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers
(OTDRs), Hand-Held Loss Test Sets.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
xxii
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an optical test set
without verifying that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off
4. All unauthorized personnel shall be excluded from the immediate area of the
optical fiber telecommunication systems during installation and service.
Consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers in the U.S.;
or, outside the U.S., IEC-60825, Part 2 for guidance on the safe use of optical fiber
optic communication in the workplace.
Technical Documentation
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is

kept at Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For more
information, please contact your local Alcatel-Lucent representative.
How to order
This information product can be ordered with the order number 365-312-847R6.0 at
the Customer Information Center (CIC), see http://www.cic.alcatel-lucent.com/.
An overview of the ordering process and the latest software & licences information is
provided in Chapter 7, Ordering of this manual.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www.

lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
xxiii
Issue 1 March 2009
Introduction
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter introduces the 1655 AMU.

Contents
1-1
System overview
1-3

Overview
Safety statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks on
Alcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazards
may have serious consequences.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
1-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D
CAUTION
Lifting hazard
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury

due to the size and weight of the equipment.
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment.
[ABC123]
F
G
H
Item
Structure element
Purpose
Safety alert symbol
Indicates the potential for personal injury

(optional)
Safety symbol
Indicates hazard type (optional)
Signal word
Indicates the severity of the hazard
Hazard type
Describes the source of the risk of damage

or injury
Safety message
Consequences if protective measures fail
Avoidance message
Protective measures to take to avoid the

hazard
Identifier
The reference ID of the safety statement

(optional)
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word
Meaning
DANGER
Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
1-2
Introduction
System overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System overview
The 1655 AMU is a high capacity, flexible and cost-effective wideband multiplexer
which can multiplex standard PDH and SDH bit rates as well as Ethernet signals to
line transport rates. In addition to a compact and flexible design, this system is a useful
element in building efficient and flexible networks due to its wide-ranging capacity.
The 2m/4o version can be equipped with 2 main boards and upgraded with 4 option
cards as described in Chapter 2, Product description and thus be adapted to special
network requirements. The 1m/1o version can hold 1 main board and upgraded with
one option board. The 2m/4o version holds two slots for main cards where operation
with either one or two main cards is possible. The second main card can be operated
as an additional tributary card or as main card equipment protection. The system
provides the ability to add one option card.
In the access network, the 1655 AMU can be installed at the customer premises for
fiber-to-the-business applications enabling a variety of configurations. Other
applications include LAN-to-LAN traffic on campus networks or WANs.
The 1655 AMU MI-16/4 is an SDH STM-1/4 and STM-4/16 Terminal or
Add-Drop-Multiplexer optimized to provide various tributary services such as
STM-1/4, 1.5 Mbit/s, 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, STM-1e, STM-4, 1000BASE-T/X
and 10/100BASE-T, to business and residential customers. The MI-14/4 main card is
an SDH STM-1/4 and STM-1 Terminal or Add/Drop Multiplexer and provides various
tributary services such as STM-1, 1.5 Mbit/s, 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, STM-1e,
STM-4, 1000BASE-T/X and 10/100BASE-T.
The standard 1655 AMU MI-16/4 main card can be equipped with two multirate
STM-1/4 or STM-4/16 interfaces using SFPs. The 1655 AMU MI-14/4 main card can
be equipped with two multirate STM-1/STM-4 and two STM-1 interfaces. When
required, the main card can be equipped with SFPs for STM-1 or STM-4 single fiber
working and STM-1e. The equipment is capable of 1+1 MSP protection and SNC/N
protection.
The space-efficient design of 1655 AMU allows for wall or rack mounting. For more
information, please refer to the 1655 AMU Installation Guide.
Applications
The network applications can be found in Chapter 4, Planning Network Applications.

Management
The 1655 AMU is managed by network management systems from Alcatel-Lucent.

This includes the local craft terminal ITM-CIT which is available for on-site tasks,
remote operations, and maintenance activities. Lucents Network Management Systems
or the Lucent NMS enable integrated management of an entire transport network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
1-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Introduction
System overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interworking
The 1655 AMU is a part of the 1655 AMU suite, which is a multi-service platform for
next generation transmission products. The system can be deployed together with other
products, for example 1643 AM / 1643 AMS. This makes 1655 AMU one of the main
building blocks for todays and future networks.
Please check with Alcatel-Lucent for a complete list of products that are able to
interwork with 1655 AMU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
1-4
Product description
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the 1655 AMU.

Chapter structure
After a description of the hardware design and system architecture, the option cards are
presented. It is then followed by the technical specifications of the 1655 AMU..
Contents
System architecture
2-3
Introduction
2-3
2-7
Introduction
2-7
2-19
Fan unit
2-21
Option cards
2-25
Introduction
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-29
2-32
Sl-14/8 option card
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-44
Legacy option cards
2-48
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52
2-52
2-74
2-81
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-2
Product description
System architecture
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System architecture
Introduction
The following sections describe the equipment architecture and the architecture and
functions of the option cards.
Functional building blocks
The different functions provided by the MI-16/4 and MI-14/4 main cards are:
Microprocessor and control circuits that manage different board elements, interfaces
(F-interface, LAN-Q, T3), and LEDs.
MI-16/4: Four STM-N (N=1, 4, 16) optical aggregate interfaces using SFPs for 2
STM-4/STM-16 and 2 STM-1/STM-4 transmission. Upto 16 VC-4s are supported
on TS1.
MI-14/4: Four STM-N (N=1, 4) optical aggregate interfaces for SFP usage of two
STM-1/STM-4 multirate and two STM-1 single rate types.
In the transmit direction, the Line Interface performs the collection of AU4s and
the STM-N assembly. It performs RSOH/MSOH insertion.
In the receive direction, the STM-N Line Interface performs the STM-N
disassembly, the RSOH/MSOH extraction, sixteen, four or one AU4 management,
and the regeneration of data transmitted to the Higher Order (HO) Cross-connect.
The HO Cross-connect also performs Tansparent DCC processing. DCC bytes are
bi-directionally cross-connected in the VC-4 matrix and is processed through the
section overhead cross-connect towards the TDM interfaces.
The following diagram illustrates the MI-16/4 (2m/4o version) system architecture.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
System architecture
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-4
Product description
System architecture
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cross-connect transmission flexibility
The following table provides a comparative description of the MI-16/4 and MI-14/4
cross-connect matrix.
MI-16/4
MI-16/1
MI-14/4
HO cross-connect
capabilities:
HO cross-connect
capabilities:
HO cross-connect
capabilities:
174*174 VC-4s
126*126 VC-4s
includes 40 VC-4s on
the line side, 40
aggregate VC-4s, and
46 VC-4s to the
tributary slots
includes 40 VC-4s on
the line side, 40
aggregate VC-4s, and
46 VC-4s to the
tributary slots
76*76 VC-4s are used

for 4 10 tributaries, 1
10 main, 2 STM-4,
2 STM-1
LO cross-connect
capabilities:
LO cross-connect
capabilities:
LO cross-connect
capabilities:
Non-blocking 48* 48
VC-4 equivalents
or
Non-blocking 48* 48
VC-4 equivalents
or
16*16 VC-4
equivalents
or
up to 192*192 VC-3s
or
up to 192*192 VC-3s
or
48*48 VC-3s
or
up to 3024*3024
VC-12s
up to 3024*3024
VC-12s
1008*1008 VC-12s
Loopbacks on incoming
STM-N optical signals via
the cross-connect matrix
Up to 40 DCN channels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
System architecture
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MI-16/4
MI-16/1
MI-14/4
4 STM-N line interfaces

with RS and MS bytes
processing; two multi-rate
STM-4 or STM-16 and two
multi-rate STM-1 or
STM-4.
One multi-rate STM-4 or

STM-16 line interface with
RS and MS bytes
processing.
4 STM-N line interfaces

with RS and MS bytes
processing; two multi-rate
STM-1 or STM-4 and two
STM-1 only.
16 VC-4s supported on TS
1 in the 2m/4o and 1m/1o
versions. 3 sets of
interfaces support
hot-pluggable tributary
slots: each set supports a
transport capacity of 10
VC-4s.
16 VC-4s supported on TS
1 in the 2m/4o and 1m/1o
versions. 3 sets of
interfaces support
hot-pluggable tributary
slots: each set supports a
transport capacity of 10
VC-4s.
4 sets of interfaces to
support hot-pluggable
tributary slots: each set
supports a transport
capacity of 10 VC-4s.
One interface between the

main cards which provides
a transport capacity of 10
VC-4s.

VC-4s.

VC-4s.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-6
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Introduction
The 1655 AMU is a high capacity, flexible and cost-effective wideband multiplexer
which can multiplex standard PDH and SDH bit rates as well as Ethernet signals to
line transport rates. The 1655 AMU is a compact SDH Multiplexer, enabling
cost-effective STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 Add/Drop Multiplexer solutions. Several
mechanical variants are defined to target specific applications. One set of boards is
used across the various mechanical configurations of the 1655 AMU.
Its space-efficient design allows for vertical (2m/4o and 1m/1o version) or horizontal
(1m/1o version) installation within controlled environment locations (interior ETSI and
19 racks). Note that the 2m/4o and 1m/1o versions and all the option cards used in
these versions support hot pluggable card insertion. The 2m/4o configuration allows the
placement of two systems side-by-side in a 19-inch or ETSI rack. The 1m/1o
configuration allows the placement of up to 5 systems side-by-side. Please refer to the
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Installation Guide for details.
2m/4o version
TRIB-4
TRIB-3
TRIB-2
TRIB-1
MAIN-2
MAIN-1
The 1655 AMU 2m/4o version has 6 slots (2 main and 4 tributary) and is optimized
for high capacity and protected Central Office applications. The first and second main
units can be plugged into the two main slots that are provided with a 2m/4o
configuration. Note that when a single main unit is used, it must be plugged into the
Main-1 slot. In the 1655 AMU 2m/4o configuration, a second main card can be fitted
for high-availability configurations or to increase the capacity for STM line interfaces.
Most of the existing 1655 AMU option boards can be fitted via an adapter card, which
occupies two tributary slots.
Start-up configuration - 1m/1o version
The 1655 AMU 1m/1o version has 2 slots (1 main and 1 tributary) and is targeted
for CPE and unprotected applications. The main unit can be plugged into the main slot
of a 1m/1o configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Introduction
TRIB
MAIN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1655 AMU start-up configuration (1m/1o version) supports 2 cages for
hot-pluggable STM-1 or STM-4 interfaces and 2 cages for hot-pluggable STM-4 or
STM-16 interfaces. Note that the MI-16/4 provides two STM-1/4 interfaces and two
STM-4/16 interfaces. The MI-14/4 provides two STM-1/4 interfaces and two interfaces
for STM-1, STM-1e or STM-1 single fiber working interfaces.
Note that the adapter card cannot be used in the 1m/1o shelf as it occupies two slots.
Subrack front view
The following figures display the 1655 AMU versions. Given below is the MI-16/4 2m/4o version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-8
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure displays the MI-16/4 - 1m1/o version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-9
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure displays the MI-14/4 - 2m/4o version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-10
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure displays the MI-14/4 - 1m/1o version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-11
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-12
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Main board - MI-16/4
The MI-16/4 main card provides the following functionality:
2 multirate STM-4/STM-16 interfaces using pluggable SFPs

Non-blocking 174 174 VC-4 cross-connect between both main cards and four
tributary cards (2m/4o unit). Supports VC-4 payloads.
Non-blocking 48 48 VC-4 equivalents for VC-12/VC-3 cross-connections
Timing functions with external synchronization input and output

Power supply filter and dual power interfaces for power consumption by the
complete shelf including the main unit
System controller with external interfaces for Q-LAN, G-LAN, ITM-CIT,

MDI/MDO, and 2 USB ports for external devices
Termination of DCC channels associated with STM-N interfaces - 40 DCC for the
Multiplex section and 40 DCC for the Regenerator section.
V.11 EOW interface

Real time clock function.
The following figure describes the front panel of the 1655 AMU MI-16/4 main board
with the supported SFP rates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-13
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
Power supply
G-LAN, Q-LAN, Station clock, Lucents Network Management

Systems or Lucent NMS, ITM-CIT
Fail LED: Unit failure indicator
Active LED: Unit activity indicator
Reset button
EOW
MDI/MDO
USB
Aggregate STM-4/STM-16 optical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-14
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aggregate STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces
The MI-14/4 main card provides the following functionality:
2 STM-1 interfaces using pluggable SFPs including STM-1e and STM-1 single
fiber working interfaces
Non-blocking 76 76 VC-4 cross-connect between both main cards and four

tributary cards (2m/4o unit). Supports VC-4 payloads.
Non-blocking 16 16 VC-4 equivalents for VC-12/VC-3 cross-connections
Timing functions with external synchronization input and output

Power supply filter and dual power interfaces for power consumption by the
complete shelf including the main unit
System controller with external interfaces for Q-LAN, G-LAN, ITM-CIT,

MDI/MDO, and 2 USB ports
Termination of DCC channels associated with 32 STM-N interfaces - 16 DCC for

the Multiplex section and 16 DCC for the Regenerator section.
V.11 EOW interface

Real time clock function
The following figure describes the front panel of the 1655 AMU MI-14/4 main card
with the supported SFP rates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-15
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-16
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that a combination of the MI-16/4 and MI-14/4 is not supported.

The MI-16/1 main card provides the following functionalities:
1 multirate STM-4/16 interface (pluggable SFPs)

Non-blocking 126 126 VC4 cross connect between both main cards and four
tributary cards. HW supports VC4, VC4-4c and VC4-16c payloads
Non-blocking 48 48 VC-4 equivalents for VC-12/VC-3 cross connections

Timing function with external synchronization input and output
Power supply filter and dual power interfaces to provide system power up to 150
W
Controller and the following external interfaces: Q-LAN, G-LAN, CIT, MDIO, 2x
USB
Termination of the DCC channels associated with 34 STM-N interfaces
Real Time Clock function

Reset button
The following figure describes the front panel of the MI-16/1 main card:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-17
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-18
Product description

Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that a combination of the MI-16/1, and MI-16/4 or MI-14/4 in the same rack is
not supported.

Overview
The street cabinet versions are a specific configuration of the 1655 AMU.
The following figure displays the front layout of a street cabinet.
The two available versions of 1655 AMU street cabinet are:
2-slot version
6-slot version
The following figures display the 2-slot street cabinet version:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-19
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figures display the 6-slot street cabinet version:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-20
Product description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each version is equipped with a specific fan unit. Ensure that the fan unit is applied
with the street cabinet version and no fan blank is available in the unit. Also make sure
that no holes are allowed on the top and bottom of the enclosure.
Features
The street cabinet version is optimized for street cabinet applications.

Although the primary application are street cabinets, the system can also be applied
in central office application.
19 rack height 1m/1o: 2 RU and 2m/4o: 5 RU
While using in a central office environment, the advantages as compared to the old
versions are as follows:
It is optimized for street-cabinet environment, resulting in 50% space saving.
Horizontal mounting and no air space required above or below the system
Provisioning and control of the applicable mandatory fan unit for this configuration.
No configuration restriction exists regarding the type, number, and position of a
main or tributary unit.
Details of horizontal positioning

Street Cabinet
version
Height
Depth
Width
2-slot
2U (88 mm)
215 mm
6-slot
5U (224 mm)
215 mm
Suitable for
horizontal mounting
in a 19 or ETSI
rack (450 mm).
This configuration contains a replaceable fan without air-filter.
Fan unit
Fan unit details
Fan unit aspect
Description
Voltage
The system operates between -40.5 and -72V. This covers the
48V and does not exclude the 60V installations.
Monitoring
Each individual fan inside the fan unit requires monitoring.
Only fans with an integrated tacho-generator are applied.

The tacho-generator in combination with the fan speed
controller can provide the feature of software controlled
constant fan rotation speed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-21
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Fan unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan unit aspect
Description
Fan temperature
constraints
Observe the fan related recommended temperature

operating range.
The fans should not run if the local fan (unit) temperature
is for example below -10 degrees Celsius.
Reduce acoustic noise at lower temperatures at night.
In case of an absent or failed system controller or fan unit

power-up, the fan unit autonomously enters the full speed
mode.
Do not change the fan speed during a software upgrade

(warm restart).
The fail safe mode takes precedence over fan temperature

constraints. It is assumed that this unlikely combination
will not persist for a long time, as the user is expected to
take necessary action, e.g. repair.
The fan unit contains a serial I2C EEPROM (SEEPROM).
The SEEPROM contains the standard applicable unit

details.
The SEPROM stores the following details:

The operation time in hours
The maximum observed local temperature.
The cumulative value of operating time multiplied by
average observed temperature
Fail safe mode
Logging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-22
Product description

Fan unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan unit power details

Fan unit power
aspect
Description
Dissipation
6-slot (ASF101)
Dissipates between 15W and 20W
Each unit has four fans and can dissipate a maximum
of (2 Main + 4 ESW = 160W), which is
approximately equal to 180W.
A fuse of 5A is applied per feeder.
The maximum allowed power is about (40V 5A)
75% = 150W.
The applied de-rating factor of 75% applies also for
street cabinet applications.
Power must be provided in a worst-case situation,
simultaneously to two or more feeders even if one
power source is available.
ESW cards dissipate almost twice as much power as
any other tributary unit. Having three or more ESW
cards in a street cabinet application is regarded as
exceptional.
2-slot (ASF102)
Dissipates between 8W and 11W.
Each unit has two fans.
Fusing
The fan contains a non-field replaceable power fuse.
Filtering and
conducted emission
Four wire fans (power, return, control and tacho) are preferred
since they require less filtering measures and hence, less
space, as compared to two or three of them.
Physical constraints
Multiple fans
Multiple fans are applied per fan unit to improve the mass flow distribution. The
1655 AMU fan unit for the 2H subrack contains 2 fans (60 60 mm).
The 1655 AMU fan unit for the 6H subrack contains 4 fans (80 80 mm). In both
cases, the fan width is at least 25 mm. It is important to replace the entire unit
even if a single fan in the unit fails.
Space requirement
The objective for designing one fan control board is that it can be applied in both
2-slot and 6-slot systems. The space needed to implement the fan control and
power logic is assessed to be 60 70 cm2. The 2-slot system (2U), in particular,
creates a space issue. Therefore, the width of the fan unit is more as compared to
the width of the fan.
Thermal aspects of the fan control circuitry.
The fan unit design takes care of the thermal aspects of the fan control circuitry.
Clearance aspects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-23
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description

Fan unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The vertical and horizontal clearance requirements are specified as under:
Vertical clearance
Street cabinet shelves do not require clearance between the AMU system and other
equipment mounted directly on top or below the system.
Horizontal clearance
There must be at least 5 cm of free space on both sides of the system. This free
space must not be used for cable routing.
User selectable air-direction selection
The user can select the air direction to either:

pushing air towards the main card, or
pulling air from the main card
The fan unit can be placed or turned in two ways and the direction is defined
during installation and realized by orientation of the fan unit. In both positions, the
unit details and air direction can be read normally.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-24
Product description
Option cards
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Option cards
Introduction
This section describes the option cards which can be used together with 1655 AMU in
order to provide interfaces for various data rates or special applications.

The PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards provide 63 times 2 Mbit/s (E1) terminated
on 32 RJ-45 connectors for the use of twisted pair cables (120 version) and coaxial
cable (75 version). It is available in 75 and 120 versions.
The following figure displays the front panel of the PI-E1/63 option card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-25
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards provide 63 times 2 Mbit/s (E1) terminated
on 32 RJ-45 connectors for the use of twisted pair cables (120 version) and coaxial
cable (75 version). It is available in 75 and 120 versions.
The following figure displays the front panel of the PI-E1/63 option card.

Interfaces
On the faceplate the EPL4_E14 card provides:
Two cages for Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers which
support 1000Base-X
Two RJ45 connectors for triple rate Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T)

Two RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)
Two RJ45 connectors for four E1 interfaces with 75 / 120 (Selection can be
made on port level via the user interface; default is 120 .)
The EPL4_E14 unit provides 4 ethernet ports. Two of these (5 and 6) support 10/100
Base-T line rates while the other two (pairs 7/8 and 9/10) are multirate ports capable of
10/100/1000 Base-T/-X. For these ports, the selection between 1000 Base-T (electrical
interfaces 8 and 9) and 1000 Base-X (optical interfaces 7 and 10) has to be done via
the NMS. This selection can be done independently for each port. When an optical port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-26
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
is in use, the electrical counterpart is inactive and vice versa. Each connector and each
SFP has its own green LED (data link up: LED ON or down: LED OFF) and yellow
LED (transmission: LED ON or no transmission: LED OFF).
The following figure shows the front panel of the EPL4_E14 option card.
E1
EPL4_E14
Rx
GE
Rx
GE
Tx
E/FE/GE
Tx
7
10
E/FE
FAIL
Lucent
The EPL_4_E14 option card is capable of compensating a maximum delay difference

of 128 ms between the fastest and the slowest VC in the receiving direction.
The EPL4_E14 option card supports a flexible allocation of SDH bandwidth to LAN
ports by making use of the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS, see LCAS
(p. 3-15)). All LAN ports have the same capabilities. Each WAN port supports
VC-12-Xv (X = 1...63), VC-3-Xv (X = 1...9), VC-4-Xv (X=1..7).
GFP Encapsulation
GFP provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals
over a transport network. GFP encapsulation is implemented according to
T1X1.5/2000-147.
The following GFP encapsulation are possible with EPL4_E14:
Mapping of Ethernet MAC frames into Lower Order SDH VC12Xv (X = 1...63)
Mapping of Ethernet MAC frames into Higher Order SDH VC4Xv (X=1..7)
LAPS encapsulation is implemented according to ITU-T X.86.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-27
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advanced rate control
The EPL4_E14 option card supports advanced rate control in the ingress and egress
direction which allows to set a strict traffic limit (PIR), in combination with a hold-off
mechanism: Excess traffic is held off until the ingress or egress buffer overflows. In
case the ingress buffer fills above a certain threshold, pause messages are sent in the
reverse direction to hold off further traffic. This behavior improves the TCP
throughput. Note that Pause messages can be only sent when the Pause mode is
enabled via the Lucent NMS.
The EPL4_E14 option card supports the Link Pass Through (LPT) mode. On
point-to-point Ethernet Private Line connections, when GFP data encapsulation is used
throughout the network, the system identifies defects from the network ingress port to
the network egress port. The GFP-CSF mechanism is used to notify the egress side that
a loss of signal (synchronization) has occurred on the ingress port. Consequently, the
egress side can either turn off the laser at the egress (in case of an optical level) or
substitute an error pattern (for example, a /V/ ordered set for a 1000BASE-X). In
addition, an alarm is raised at the egress side which indicates the ingress side
condition. For more information about Link Pass Through, please refer to (LPT, see
Functionality (p. 3-16)). For additional information, please refer the TransLAN
Ethernet SDH Transport Solution Applications and Planning Guide.
The EPL4_E14 option card supports Auto MDI/MDIX selection on the GE ports 8 and
9. It does not support Auto MDI/MDIX functions on the FE ports 5 and 6.
Transmission rates
The following rates are supported with EPL4_E14:
Mapping Ethernet packets into VC12-Xv (X = 1...63)

Mapping Ethernet packets into VC4-Xv (X=1..7)
Flexible bandwidth assignment
The transmission capacity of the EPL4_E14 option card towards the cross-connect
matrix is 8 VC4s. These can be freely assigned to 4 VCGs. There is a fixed 1:1
relationship from the 4 Ethernet ports to the 4 VCGs. For an illustrated description, see
(p. 2-29).
From the eight VC-4s, two can be individually substructured to VC-12s to provide
upto 2 63 VC-12s. In this case, the first four VC-12s are reserved for the E1 ports.
Note that in case E1 interfaces are used, the first VC-4 needs to be substructured,
otherwise, they are not available. In addition, 3 VC-4s can be individually
substructured to VC-3, thereby providing a total of nine VC-3s.
The remaining 3 VC-4s cannot be substructured. For each of the 4 VCGs, a selection
can be made between VC-12-Xv (X=1-63), VC-3-Xv (X=1-9), and VC-4-Xv (X=1-7),
based on the total number of containers that are available for each type.
The following diagram illustrates the VC/VCG mapping for the EPL4_E14 option card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-28
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Jumbo frame support
The EPL4_E14 option card supports overlength Ethernet frames (also known as Jumbo
frames) on LAN ports 7, 8, and 9, 10.
Loopbacks on outgoing FE/GbE signals
The EPL4_E14 option card supports loopbacks on outgoing FE and GbE signals on
electrical and optical ports.

Interfaces
On the faceplate, the EPL4_E132 (120 ) and EPL4_E132_75 (75 ) boards provide:
Four RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)
Sixteen RJ45 connectors to cover 32 E1 interfaces (2 E1 per RJ45) with 75

/120 versions
All four Ethernet RJ45 connectors have their own green and yellow LEDs which
indicates a LAN connection and traffic flow respectively.
The following figure shows the front panel of the EPL4_E132_75 option card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-29
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
EPL4_E132 (120) and EPL4_E132_75 (75) option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cards
1
4
EPL4_E132_75
3
2
36
E/FE
35
34
E/FE
33
2
8 FAIL
Lucent
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards supports a flexible allocation of

SDH bandwidth to LAN ports by making use of the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
(LCAS, see LCAS (p. 3-15)). All LAN ports have the same capabilities. Each WAN
port supports VC-12-Xv (X = 1...63), VC-3-Xv (X = 1...9), VC-4-Xv (X=1..7).
The EPL4_E132 and EPL_4_E132_75 option cards are able to compensate a maximum
delay difference of 128 ms between the fastest and the slowest VC in the receiving
direction.
GFP encapsulation
T1X1.5/2000-147.
The following GFP encapsulation are possible with EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75:
Mapping of Ethernet MAC frames into Higher Order SDH VC4Xv (X=1..7)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-30
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cards
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards support advanced rate control in the
ingress and egress direction which allows to set a strict traffic limit (PIR), in
combination with a hold-off mechanism: Excess traffic is held off until the ingress or
egress buffer overflows. In case the ingress buffer fills above a certain threshold, pause
messages are sent in the reverse direction to hold off further traffic. This behaviour
improves the TCP throughput. Note that Pause messages are only sent when the Pause
mode is enabled via the Lucent NMS.
Auto-negotiation
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards support Auto-negotiation. The

Auto-negotiation function automatically configures the Ethernet interface parameters to
establish an optimal Ethernet link based on the capabilities of the near-end and far-end
Ethernet interfaces.
Auto-negotiation for twisted-pair systems, defined in Clause 28 of the Standard
802.3-2002, has been extended to include all three speeds of Ethernet that are
supported over twisted-pair cable: 10Mbit/s 10Base-T, 100Mbit/s 100Base- TX, and
1000 Mbit/s 1000Base-T. For more information about Auto-negotiation support, please
refer to the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards support the Link Pass Through
(LPT) mode. On point-to-point Ethernet Private Line connections, when GFP data
encapsulation is used throughout the network, the system identifies defects from the
network ingress port to the network egress port. The GFP-CSF mechanism is used to
notify the egress side that a loss of signal (synchronization) has occurred on the ingress
port. An alarm is raised at the egress side which indicates the ingress side condition.
For more information, please refer to (see LPT, Functionality (p. 3-16)). For
additional information, please also refer to the TransLAN Ethernet SDH Transport
Solution Applications and Planning Guide.
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards support Auto MDI/MDIX selection
on all LAN ports.
Transmission rates
The following rates are supported with EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75:

Mapping Ethernet packets into VC4-Xv (X=1..7)
The transmission capacity of the EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards towards
the cross-connect matrix is 9 VC-4s. One VC-4 is reserved for the 32 E1 ports and
is not available for the VCGs. The remaining 8 VC-4s can be freely assigned to 4
VCGs. There is a fixed 1:1 relationship from the 4 Ethernet ports to the 4 VCGs. For
an illustrated description, see (see fig. on page 2-17).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-31
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cards
From the 8 VC-4s, two can be individually substructured to VC-12s, thereby providing
upto 2 63 VC-12s. In this case, the first 4 VC-12s of the first VC-4 remain unused.
In addition, 3 VC-4s can be individually substructured to VC-3s, providing a total of 9
VC-3s. The remaining 3 VC-4s cannot be substructured. For each of the 4 VCGs, a
selection can be made between VC-12-Xv (X=1-63), VC-3-Xv (X=1-9), and VC-4-Xv
(X=1-7), based on the total number of containers that are available for each type.
The VC/VCG mapping is shown in the following figure:
Jumbo Frame support
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards support overlength Ethernet frames
(also known as Jumbo frames) on LAN ports 35 and 36.
The EPL4_E132 and EPL4_E132_75 option cards support loopbacks on outgoing FE

and GbE signals on electrical and optical ports.

Interfaces
On the faceplate, the ESW4_E14 card provides:
Two LAN ports for Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers which
support 1000 Base-X optical SFPs or can be used as 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical
ports using RJ-45 connectors.
Two LAN ports for dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T) using RJ-45 connectors.
Two RJ-45 connectors on the faceplate for four E1 interfaces with 75/120
(Selection can be made on port level via the user interface; default is 120 ).
The ESW4_E14 option card provides 4 Ethernet ports. Two of these (5 and 6) support
10/100 Base-T line rates, while the other two (pairs 7/8 and 9/10) are multirate and
capable of 10/100/1000 Base-T/-X rates. For these ports, the selection between 1000
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-32
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Base-T (electrical interfaces 8 and 9) and 1000 Base-X (optical interfaces 7 and 10)
must be done via the ITM-CIT. This selection can be done independently for each port.
When an optical port is in use, the electrical counterpart is inactive and vice versa.
Each connector and each SFP has its own green LED (data link up: LED ON or down:
LED OFF) and yellow LED (transmission: LED ON or no transmission: LED OFF).
The total transmission backplane capacity is 16 VC-4s. This capacity is only
available in combination with an MI-16/4 main card, provided the ESW4_E14 card is
placed in the first slot (TS1). In any other slot or when combined with the MI-14/4
main card, the maximum useable capacity is 10 VC-4s.
The following figure shows the front panel of the ESW4_E14 option card.
Transmission rates
The following transmission rates are supported with ESW4_E14:

When the ESW4_E14 option card is inserted in tributary slot 1 of a 2m/4o or 1m/1o
version and the main unit is an M1-16/4, the total capacity of the unit is equivalent to
16 VC4s (2.5 Gbit/s) with which up to eight VCGs can be created and each VCG can
be assigned to a WAN port. For WAN ports 1 though 4, a capacity of eight VC4s (1
through 8) is available. By default, the 1st and 2nd VC4s are substructured in VC12s.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-33
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Similarly, the 3rd, 4th, and 5th VC4s are substructured as VC3s. Optionally, the 1st to
5th VC4s can be changed to unstructured VC4. The 6th, 7th, and 8th VC4s can only
be used as VC4s. As a result, VC12-Xv (X=1..63), VC3-Xv (X=1..9) and/or VC4-Xv
(X=1..7) groups can be created from at most 122 VC12s, 9 VC3s or 8 VC4s.
For WAN ports 5 through 8, a capacity of eight VC4s (9 though 16) is available. Of
these 8 VC4s, the 9th and 10th VC-4 are substructured in VC12s and the 11th, 12th,
and 13th VC4 are substructured in VC3s, by default. Optionally, the 9th to 13th VC4s
can be changed to unstructured VC4. The VC4s 14 through 16 can only be used as
VC4s. As a result, VC12-Xv (X=1..63), VC3-Xv (X=1..9) and/or VC4-Xv (X=1..7)
groups can be created from at most 126 VC12s, 9 VC3s or 8 VC4s.
Note that if the E1 interfaces are used, four VC12s of the first VC4 must be reserved
for E1 transport. In this case, it is mandatory to substructure the first VC4 to carry 63
VC12s.
The system automatically detects if the combination of slot number, main unit, and
tributary unit allows 16 VC4 backplane capacity. No provisioning is required.
The following VC/VCG mapping diagram displays bandwidth selection options for the
WAN ports 1, 2, 3, and 4.
The following VC/VCG mapping diagram displays the bandwidth selection options for
the WAN ports 5, 6, 7, and 8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-34
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Jumbo frame support
The ESW4_E14 option card supports overlength Ethernet frames (also known as
Jumbo frames) on all LAN ports and on WAN ports 1, 2, 5 and 6. On the other ports
1650Bytes applies.
The ESW4_E14 option card can compensate a maximum delay difference of 64 ms
between the fastest and the slowest VC in receive direction.
Enhanced flow classification
The ESW4_E14 unit supports an enhanced flow classification mechanism, both in

802.1Q mode and in 802.1ad mode. The flow classification functionality can be
enabled per port by setting the QoS Mode parameter to Flow Configuration.
Depending on the Port Role provisioning, the following options are supported:
In case a port is provisioned in the Customer Role, the ingress traffic can be
distributed over at most eight different Flow Groups (belonging to a single Flow
Group Table) where each Flow Group can be defined by some DMAC value or a
combination of C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) and C-UP (Customer User
Priority) values or an IP-ToS (IP Type of Service) value. Instead of explicit values,
bit masks can also be used to define a Flow Group. The Flow Groups in the Flow
Group Table form an ordered set and ingressing frames are matched to the different
Flow Group definitions in the order in which they are entered in the Flow Group
Table. The last entry in each Flow Group Table is always OTHERS, to which all
frames will be classified that do not match any of the other Flow Group criteria. It
is not possible to delete the OTHERS entry from any Flow Group Table.
In case a port is provisioned in the Network Role, the flow classification process is
carried out in two steps. First the traffic is subdivided in different Flow Group
Tables and next the traffic is classified to individual Flow Groups within each Flow
Group Table. The classification into distinct Flow Group Tables is based on
combinations of S-VID and S-UP values (including masks). Depending on how the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-35
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Flow Group Table is defined, it can contain either a single Flow Group (fixed to
OTHERS) or eight Flow Groups, which can be provisioned in the same manner
as for a Customer Role Port. In case the Flow Group Table contains an expression
for S-UP that differs from S-UP = ALL, only a single flow is defined by the
Flow Group Table, i.e. the OTHERS flow.
Once a flow is defined the user can assign a Flow Profile to it from a set of
pre-defined Flow Profiles. Each Flow Profile consists of a reference number and an
associated set of QoS parameters: Committed Information Rate (CIR), Committed
Burst Size (CBS) , Peak Information Rate (PIR), Peak Burst Size (PBS), Traffic Class
(TC).
The following system level provisioning limits are applicable:
Maximum 250 Flow Profiles
Maximum 600 Flow Group Tables
In case the QoS Mode is set to Default Profile, the Flow Classification operates as
follows:
In case a port is provisioned in the Customer Role, all ingress traffic is assigned to
the same Flow Group, which has the Default CR Profile properties.
In case a port is provisioned in the Network Role, all ingress traffic is assigned to
eight different Flow Groups, based on their S-UP value, which have the Default
NR Profile properties.
Auto-negotiation
The ESW4_E14 option card supports Auto-negotiation. The Auto-negotiation function

automatically configures the Ethernet interface parameters to establish an optimal
Ethernet link based on the capabilities of the near-end and far-end Ethernet interfaces.
supported over twisted-pair cable: 10Mbit/s 10Base-T, 100Mbit/s 100Base-TX, and
1000 Mbit/s 1000Base-T. For more information about Auto-negotiation, please refer to
the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
The ESW4_E14 option card supports a flexible allocation of SDH bandwidth to LAN
ports by making use of the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS, see LCAS
(p. 3-15)). All LAN ports have the same capabilities. Each WAN port supports
VC-12-Xv (X = 1...63), VC-3-Xv (X = 1...9), VC-4-Xv (X = 1...7).
Repeater mode
For units containing Ethernet switches, it is possible to emulate the behavior of a

private line port by creating a two-port virtual switch, with one LAN and one WAN
port and provision it in Repeater Mode. This feature can be implemented in both
Ethertype 8100 and Ethertype 9100 modes. In this mode, all traffic from the LAN or
WAN side is transparently passed through, except the pause messages. The Pause
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-36
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
protocol operates on the LAN interface and therefore, transmission without loss can be
obtained if the peer node on the LAN link obeys the commands contained in pause
messages.
Note: The ESW4_E14 (ASC108) will drop frames in repeater mode when source
MAC address and destination MAC address are equal.
GFP encapsulation
T1X1.5/2000-147.
The following GFP encapsulation are possible with ESW4_E14:
Mapping Ethernet MAC frames into Lower Order SDH VC12-Xv (X = 1...63)
Mapping Ethernet MAC frames into Lower Order SDH VC3-Xv (X = 1...21)
Mapping Ethernet MAC frames into Higher Order SDH VC4-Xv (X = 1...7)

The ESW4_E14 option card supports advanced rate control in the ingress and egress
direction which enables users to set a strict traffic limit (PIR), in combination with a
hold-off mechanism: Excess traffic is held off until the ingress or egress buffer
overflows. In case the ingress buffer fills above a certain threshold, pause messages are
sent in the reverse direction to hold off further traffic. This behaviour improves the
TCP throughput.
Provisioning Committed Burst Size (CBS)
The Flow Profile containing the parameters that define the QoS regime and is applied
to a flow contains a user provisionable entry for the Committed Burst Size (CBS).
This entry describes the number of octets that may be bursted before a frame is no
longer considered part of the Committed Rate. The CBS rate can be provisioned in
kbytes between 1 and 25000 or as a time constant relative parameter to CIR: 10 or 110
ms.
Provisioning Peak Burst Size (PBS)
The Flow Profile containing the parameters that define the QoS regime and is applied
to a flow contains a user provisionable entry for the Peak Burst Size (PBS).
This entry describes the number of octets that may be bursted before a frame is no
longer considered part of the Peak Rate. The PBS rate can be provisioned in kbytes
between 1 and 25000 or as a time constant relative parameter to CIR: 10 or 110 ms.
QoS features
The ESW4_E14 option card supports the following QOS features:
Two rate three color marker (RFC 2697, RFC 2698, and MEF 10) per flow
(switchable color aware/color unaware)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-37
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Based on provisioned threshold rates (CIR and PIR):

Red - The frame is dropped
Yellow - The Dropping Precedence of the frame is set to high
Green - The Dropping Precedence of the frame is set to low

Over subscription (2 levels of Dropping Precedence) and strict policing modes
Based on queue filling and the Dropping Precedence, frames can be dropped to
avoid congestion
A queue will allow fewer yellow frames than green frames
4 traffic classes, 4 egress queues per port
Each QOS profile contains a Traffic Class (TC) entry.
The traffic class determines the relative priority of a frame based on the traffic
class to queue assignment function and the scheduler settings
The traffic class determines the outgoing p-bits for the egress direction
Egress queue scheduling with strict Priority and/or Weighted Bandwidth options.
The system allows the user to provision the value of the p0-bit (used for dropping
precedence marking) in the VLAN-tag of frames that egress a Virtual Switch in
IEEE 802.1Q mode (TPID = 0x8100) . This is set through a customer role port, to
the value 0 or 1 or leave the bit unchanged.
The ESW4_E14 option card supports loopbacks on outgoing FE and GbE signals on
electrical and optical ports. Note that the ESW4_E14 option card supports loopbacks
only when the ports are set to repeater mode.
TPID conversion on network role ports
Ingress direction
If the S-Tag of incoming frames on a certain port is identified by a TPID different

from the one used internally in the TransLAN network, then this TPID can be
identified and overwritten by the internal value.
Egress direction
If the S-Tag on a certain egress link is identified by a TPID different from the one
used internally in the TransLAN network, then the internal TPID can be overwritten by
a provisioned value.
TPID conversion features
The user can enable or disable this conversion option individually on each network
role port.
The user can provision the TPID value to be replaced on the unit level, independent
per direction.
TPID conversion takes place before any other filtering or processing step is
performed by the switch.
CFI-bit and P-bit conversion on Network Role Ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-38
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ingress direction: The set of three P-bits and the CFI-bit of incoming frames can be
converted to a different set of P-bits and CFI-bit to adapt an externally used

interpretation of these bits to the TransLAN interpretation.
Egress direction:The set of three P-bits and the CFI-bit of outgoing frames can be
converted from the TransLAN standard usage to a different set of P-bits and CFI-bit to
adapt an externally used interpretation of these bits.
Conversion features:
This re-mapping of the P-bits/CFI-bit-tuple option can be enabled on each network

port individually.
The conversion map is provisioned at the unit level, independent per direction.
P/CFI-bit conversion takes place before the virtual switch performs any other
filtering or processing.
Translation of (R)STP BPDU on network role ports
The system supports modification of VID and D-MAC fields of the spanning tree
BPDUs transmitted through a Network Role port of a virtual switch.
Simple link aggregation
On a physical switch, the user can provision two LAN ports belonging to the same
virtual switch operating at the same transmission speed, to form a Link Aggregation
Group. The Link Aggregation Group on 1655 AMU R6.0 is available only for 1Gbit/s
ports.
At the transmit side, the traffic is distributed over both links based on a hash of the
DMAC and SMAC fields of the frame. In case one link fails, the traffic is moved to
the remaining link.
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is used to synchronize both ends with
respect to the active links.
MAC layer access control lists
For a customer role port on a virtual switch, the user can create an Access Control List
(ACL) by selecting one or more entries from a predefined list of MAC protocols.
Incoming frames with a destination MAC address matching one of the values implied
by the ACL, are dropped silently. A different ACL can be constructed for each
customer role port.
Ethernet link OA&M
The user can enable or disable Ethernet Link OA&M according to IEEE Std. 802.3ah
individually on each LAN port (optical/electrical GbE or FE).
On the ports where 802.3ah Link OAM is enabled, an incoming critical link event is
treated as an additional trigger for Link Pass Through.
A remote 1850 TSS-3 attached to a LAN port can be supported as an 802.3ah peer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-39
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following sections of this standard are supported:
OAM discovery protocol

Remote loopback
Layer 1 performance monitoring
Remote failure indication
Sl-14/8 option card

Interfaces
On the faceplate, the Sl-14/8 card provides:
Eight cages for Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers
support for STM-1 or STM-4 SFPs via port 1 and port 5
support for STM-1 SFPs via ports 2 to 4 and ports 6 to 8
The board supports 1.2 Gigabit interfaces and provides a total transmission capacity of
eight VC-4s. This capacity is divided into two VC-4 groups namely, the SFP-1 to
SFP-4 group and the SFP-5 to SFP-8 group. Each group provides a four VC-4
transmission capacity. For example, if SFP-1 is equipped with an STM-4 interface, the
SFP-2 to SFP-4 have no more capacity and cannot be used. Similarly, if the SFP-5 is
equipped with an STM-4 interface, the SFP-6 to SFP-8 is being utilized and therefore
cannot be used for any additional capacity.
Each SFP transceiver has an LED which indicates three states. When the LED is on, it
indicates hardware failures and confugration alarm. When the LED is blinking, it
indicates transmission failure. When there are no failures, the LED is off. A fault on
the SFP is indicated by an LED on the SFP itself and not on the host units LED.
The STM-1 and STM-4 in-loop and out-loop loopbacks are achieved by the
cross-connect functionality.
The following figure shows the front panel of the Sl-14/8 option card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-40
Product description
Option cards
Sl-14/8 option card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To use legacy option cards in the 2m/4o hardware version an adapter is required to fit
the card into the subrack. The figure below shows an empty adapter card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-41
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
Adapter card for legacy option cards (for 2m/4o version
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
only)

The E3DS3/3_E14 card provides three switched 34/45 Mbit/s interfaces on DIN1.6/5.6
coaxial connectors and 4 E1 interfaces on RJ45 (2 E1 interfaces per RJ45).
The system provides a 12 E3/DS3 Interface Circuit Pack containing twelve
bidirectional 34/45 Mbit/s electrical interfaces. The circuit pack can be used in
tributary slot 1 to 4.
The user can select the mixed E3/DS3 ports per interface, to operate either in E3 mode
or in DS3 mode.
The following figure displays the front panel of the PI-E3DS3/3_E14 option card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-42
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-43
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Interfaces
The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards are switched Ethernet cards that
provide Ethernet and E1 access on the faceplate/LAN side and Ethernet over PDH
mapped signals on the backplane/WAN side.
Note: The EOP4_E132 unit supports 120 E1 interfaces for twisted pair cabling
and the EOP4_E132_75 unit supports 75 E1 interfaces for coaxial cabling.
On the faceplate, the EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 units provide the following
interfaces on RJ45 connectors:
2 10/100 BaseT
2 10/100/1000 BaseT
32 E1 interfaces (Two E1 interfaces per RJ45) optimized for 120 (in case of
EOP4_E132 option card)/75 (in case EOP4_E132_75 option card) twisted pair
UTP cabling
These units provide two protected TXI-155 signals (all VC4/TU12 structured)
interfaces on the backplane.
Note: The 32 E1 physical interfaces optimized for the 120/75 twisted-pair
cabled environment are terminated on sixteen RJ-45 connectors on the faceplate.
These are mapped via VC12/VC4 into an STM-1 backplane format.
The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 units provide two 10/100BASE-T electrical LAN
ports and two triple rate 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical LAN ports on RJ-45
connectors. Additionally, these units support sixteen Ethernet WAN ports, of which the
frames are mapped via GFP and E1 into E1-Xv groups (with X = 1, .., 16). The total
number of E1s is 64 and these are mapped via VC12/VC4 into an STM-1 backplane
format.
The outgoing Ethernet signals can be synchronized to the system clock.
Transmission
The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 units provide two distinct transmission paths.
One is from the backplane TXI155 directly to the RJ45 connectors that provide
G.703-style E1 access. The other transmission path is from the backplane TXI155 via
the Ethernet- over-PDH and GFP-F termination functions, through an Ethernet switch
to one of the Ethernet ports.
Note: It is not possible to make a connection between both paths on the option
cards. Such connections are to be made via the lower order cross-connect matrix on
the main unit.
The following figure shows the block diagram of the EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75
option cards:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-44
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 units support flexible assignment of VC capacity

to create various sizes of VCGs. The capacity available for the formation of VCG is
equivalent to 64 E1s and up to 16 VCGs can be created using this capacity. The 64
E1s are partitioned in 4 groups each having 16 E1s. From each of these groups, up to
four P12s-Xv VCGs of variable sizes (X ranging from 1{{..16) can be formed.
Note: The value of X is determined by the LCAS protocol and LCAS
provisioning.
The 1655 AMU supports Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) for P12s-Xv
concatenated signals, using the TS1 bits of multiframe position 1. The LCAS defines
a synchronization protocol between two termination points of a virtual concatenated
path. This protocol allows in-service dynamic sizing of the P12s-Xv bandwidth
available for data over PDH transmission.
The change in bandwidth occurs in one of the following situations:
as a response to a failure condition in one of the members

change in bandwidth requirement as a result of provisioning action on the NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-45
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of a failure, the bandwidth will be restored automatically after the failure
clears.
Note: In accordance with ITU-T G.7042/Y.1305, the size of the P12s-Xv is
increased or decreased in steps of one P12s.
Mapping Ethernet frames into P12s-Xv: GFP-F
The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 units support the following mapping scheme for
Ethernet frames:
AU4 < - > VC4 < - > X*TU12 < - > X*VC12 < - > X*P12s < - > P12s-Xv < - >
GFP < - > 802.3
The GFP-F encapsulation scheme follows ITU-T G.7041 and the mapping of GFP-F in
P12s-Xv is specified in ITU-T G.8040 and G.7043 standards. The number of virtual
concatenated P12s containers (i.e. X) ranges from 1 to 16.
GFP-FCS support for P12s-Xv in GFP-F mapping
The user can provision a CRC32 checksum to each transmitted GFP-F frame which is
to be transported over a P12s-Xv channel.
Ethernet link OA&M
The user can enable or disable Ethernet link OA&M according to IEEE Std. 802.3ah
individually on each LAN port (optical/electrical GbE or FE).
On the ports where 802.3ah Link OAM is enabled, an incoming critical link event is
treated as an additional trigger for Link Pass Through.
A remote 1850 TSS-3 attached to a LAN port can be supported as an 802.3ah peer.
The following sections of this standard are supported:
OAM discovery protocol
Remote loopback
Layer 1 performance monitoring
Remote failure indication
Support for 16k MAC addresses
The MAC address table in the Ethernet bridge is capable of holding up to 16k different
MAC address entries. It may be noted that this is a theoretical number as the total
memory space will not be sequentially accessed and memory collisions happen
before 16k entries have been entered. In such situations, the new entry overwrites the
previous entry. Under normal operation, addresses that are not in use for 5 minutes are
deleted from the table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-46
Product description
Option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual STP timer provisioning
The following parameters of the STP running on a virtual switch can be modified by
the user via the OS or CIT interface:
Hello time
Max. age
Transmit hold count
Retrieving additional STP information
The following parameters of the STP, running on a virtual switch, can be retrieved by
the user via the OS or CIT interface:
Hello time (current values)
Max. age (current values)
Time since topology change

Topology change count
The parameters listed above are defined in IEEE Std. 802.1D-2004, clause 14.8.1.1.3.
Additionally, the following information can be retrieved from each STP port:
Port identifier and port role
Port forward transitions
Force port state

Adminconnection and OperConnection types
Port designated root and cost
Port designated bridge and port
PDH Performance Monitoring: 2 Mbit/s
An incoming framed G.704.2 Mbit/s (P12s) signal terminating in the NE can be

subjected to performance monitoring in accordance with G.705 and G.784. This is
applicable to both near-end and bi-directional performance monitoring.
Note: This feature is applicable to E1 channels that are used for Ethernet over PDH
mapping.
Flexible traffic class to queue assignment
The OS or the ITM-CIT can be used to change or retrieve the mapping of Traffic
Classes (TC) to the egress queues, specific to each virtual switch.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-47
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
Legacy option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legacy option cards

X2E3-V2 option card (legacy)
The X2E3-V2 option card provides two bidirectional 34 Mbit/s (E3) interfaces.
X2DS3-V2 option card (legacy)
The X2DS3-V2 option card provides two additional 45 Mbit/s (DS3) interfaces.
X16DS1 option card (legacy)
The X16DS1-V3 option card provides 16 additional 1.5 Mbit/s (DS1) interfaces. The
following table describes the DS1 port mapping.
TPx.1
CC1,x.111
TPx.2
CC1,x.112
TPx.3
CC1,x.113
TPx.4
CC1,x.121
TPx.5
CC1,x.122
TPx.6
CC1,x.123
TPx.7
CC1,x.131
TPx.8
CC1,x.132
TPx.9
CC1,x.133
TPx.10
CC1,x.141
TPx.11
CC1,x.142
TPx.12
CC1,x.143
TPx.13
CC1,x.151
TPx.14
CC1,x.152
TPx.15
CC1,x.153
TPx.16
CC1,x.161
X8PL option card (legacy)
The X8PL option card provides eight Ethernet interfaces in Private Line mode for the
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU. The Private Line mode enables traffic to be
mapped from each Ethernet port one-to-one into an SDH container. Thus a private
connection from an Ethernet port through an SDH network to another Ethernet port at
the remote end of the link is possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-48
Product description
Option cards
Legacy option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The X8PL option card supports a flexible allocation of SDH bandwidth to LAN ports
by making use of the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS, see LCAS (p. 3-15)
). All LAN ports have the same capabilities. Each WAN port supports VC-12-Xv (X =
1...63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1...3).
The VC-12s that form one VCG can be chosen from any TUG-3, in any timeslot order.
However, it is recommended to select the VC-12s in sequential order, preferably in one
TUG-3. In this way the end-to-end network design can be kept simple and easy to
maintain.
To use the X8PL card in the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU, an adapter card
is required, see (p. 2-42)
X4IP option card (legacy)
On the 1655 AMU an Ethernet LAN option board (X4IP) is available providing four
10/100BASE-T Ethernet interfaces. When equipped with an option card, Alcatel-Lucent
SDH multiplexers can offer 10/100BASE-T Ethernet interfaces besides the standard
TDM services like DS1, E1, E3/DS3, E4, STM-1 and STM-4. A description of the
X4IP option card functionality supported by the 1655 AMU is given below:
The following table describes basic characteristics of the X4IP option card.
LAN interfaces
4 10/100 BASE-T
Max. number of WAN ports
Supported rates
VC-12, VC-3
Max. VCG group size
VC-12-5v, VC-3-2v
Max. number of tributaries
VC-12: 20, VC-3: 2
LCAS support
Encapsulation method
GFP-F or EoS
Max. transport capacity
1 155 Mbit/s
Service rates
Max. 1 port at 100 Mbit/s + 3 ports at 2

... 10 Mbit/s, or 2 ports at 50 Mbit/s + 2
ports at 2 ... 10 Mbit/s, or 4 ports at 2 ...
10 Mbit/s.
Behavior of X4IP in 9100 tagged traffic
At times X4IP in 9100 tagged traffic does not function and neither traffic nor
STP-PDUs are sent.
When does this occur
This issue occurs only when X4IP is used as repeater to convert WAN- to LAN-traffic.
Reason
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-49
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Option cards
Legacy option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is because the Repeater on a X4IP is not a real repeater but a Repeater-like
switch. The Repeater functionality is simulated by tagging and untagging traffic in
9100 mode with a VLAN which is not used in other virtual switches (default : 4093).
The consequence of this implementation is that the Repeater does not work for 9100
Tagged traffic.
Resolution
When using X4IP as a repeater, the traffic tagged with a ethertype value is not
forwarded if the repeater is also set to the same ethertpye value. As soon as both
values differ, the traffic and STP-PDU forwarding function as expected on the X4IP.
X4IP option card mapping
The X4IP option board supports an AU-4 <-> VC-4 <-> TUG-3 <-> TUG-2 <->
X*TU-12 <->X*VC-12 <->VC-12-Xv <->GFP/EoS mapping scheme
The X4IP option board supports an AU-4 <-> VC-4 <-> TUG-3 <-> X*TU-3 <->
X*VC-3 <->VC-3-Xv <-> GFP/EoS mapping scheme
The GFP/EoS protocol is according to T1X1.5/99-268.

VC12-Xv means a grouping of VC-12-s to a single virtual link with the
bandwitch of x*VC-12.
VC3-Xv means a grouping of VC-3s to a single virtual link with the bandwidth of
x*VC3.
Per port (MAC) VC-12/VC-3 concatenation is 1..5 VC-12 or 1..2 VC-3.
Ethernet WAN port capacity configuration rules
The encapsulated Ethernet frames are mapped in VC-12 (2 Mbit/s), VC-12-2v (4

Mbit/s), VC-12-3v (6 Mbit/s), VC-12-4v (8 Mbit/s), VC-12-5v (10 Mbit/s), VC-3 (50
Mbit/s) or VC-3-2v (100 Mbit/s). A user can provision the actual bandwidth per WAN
port. Since the cross-connect capacity of a 1655 AMU is limited, the total combined
bandwidth of all WAN ports together must follow the WAN capacity configuration
rules defined in the table below.
WAN
port
WAN 2.1
WAN 2.2
WAN 2.3
WAN 2.4
Option
1
100 Mbit/s
(VC-3-2v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
Option
2
50 Mbit/s (VC-3)
50 Mbit/s (VC-3)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
Option
3
50 Mbit/s (VC-3)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
Option
4
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
50 Mbit/s (VC-3)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
Option
5
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
10 Mbit/s
(VC-12-5v)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-50
Product description
Option cards
Legacy option cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The throughput mentioned in the table above are the maximum settings, it is also
possible to have less throughput for a certain WAN port (for example 6 Mbit/s
(VC-12-3v)).
Notice that only the WAN port bandwidth dictates the effective end-to-end Ethernet
communication throughput, not the LAN ports. The 1655 AMU equipped with the
TransLAN option board keep track of the available capacity according to the rules
defined in the WAN port configuration table above. If an attempt to configure a new
WAN port capacity violates the rules, the system does not grant the new configuration
and triggers an alarm (message).
Ethernet WAN port mapping
The WAN port mapping of the X4IP is shown in the following table. In case the units
in service do not use the same termination points, adaptation via the LO cross connect
is required.
Capacity
WAN port
WAN port 2
WAN port 3
WAN port 4
TPx.1100
TPx.1200
50 Mbit/s
TPx.1100
TPx.1200
10 Mbit/s
TPx.1311
TPx.1323
TPx.1342
TPx.1361
TPx.1312
TPx.1331
TPx.1343
TPx.1362
TPx.1313
TPx.1332
TPx.1351
TPx.1363
TPx.1321
TPx.1333
TPx.1352
TPx.1371
TPx.1322
TPx.1341
TPx.1353
TPx.1372
TPx.1311
TPx.1323
TPx.1342
TPx.1361
TPx.1312
TPx.1331
TPx.1343
TPx.1362
TPx.1313
TPx.1332
TPx.1351
TPx.1363
TPx.1321
TPx.1333
TPx.1352
TPx.1371
TPx.1311
TPx.1323
TPx.1342
TPx.1361
TPx.1312
TPx.1331
TPx.1343
TPx.1362
TPx.1313
TPx.1332
TPx.1351
TPx.1363
TPx.1311
TPx.1323
TPx.1342
TPx.1361
TPx.1312
TPx.1331
TPx.1343
TPx.1362
TPx.1311
TPx.1323
TPx.1342
TPx.1361
100 Mbit/s
8 Mbit/s
6 Mbit/s
4 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
QoS
For the X4IP option card, the IEEE 802.1p is valid. The ESW4_E14 option card
supports Enhanced Flow Classification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-51
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The following sections provide the technical specifications for the 1655 AMU
Contents
2-52
2-74
2-81
Optical Interfaces
STM-1
The table below lists some parameters and the end of life power budgets for the
STM-1 optical SFPs:
Application
S-1.1 (I-1)
L-1.1
L-1.2
Operating wavelength range
1260 - 1360 nm
1270 - 1360 nm
1480 - 1580 nm
Source type
MLM
SLM / MLM
SLM
Spectral width at -20 dB (max)
NA
1 nm (SLM)
1 nm
RMS spectral width (max)
7.7 nm
3 nm (MLM)
NA
Side mode suppression ratio (min)
NA
30 dB / NA
30 dB
Mean launched power (max)
-8 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Mean launched power (min)
-15 dB
-5 dB
-5 dB
Extinction ratio (min)
8.2 dB
10 dB
10 dB
Mask of the eye diagram of the

optical transmit signal
see G.957
see G.957
see G.957
Maximum dispersion
96 ps/nm
NA / 246 ps/nm
NA
Attenuation range
0 - 12 dB
10 - 28 dB
10 - 28 dB
Minimum optical return loss of the

cable plant at point S including the
optical connector
NA
NA
20 dB
Transmitter at reference point S
Optical path between points S and R
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-52
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application
S-1.1 (I-1)
L-1.1
L-1.2
-28 dBm
-34 dBm
-34 dBm
Overload (min)
-8 dBm
-10 dBm
-10 dBm
Optical path penalty
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
Optical return loss of the receiver

(min)
NA
NA
> 25 dB
Receiver at reference point R

Sensitivity (min) @ BER = 1 10
-10
STM-4
STM-4 optical SFPs:
Application
S-4.1
L-4.2
1274 - 1356 nm
1480 - 1580 nm
Source type
MLM
SLM
Spectral width at -20 dB (max)
NA
1 nm
2.5 nm
NA
NA
30 dB
-8 dBm
+2 dBm
-15 dBm
-3 dBm
8.2 dB
10 dB
Mask of the eye diagram of the optical transmit signal
see G.957
see G.957
Maximum dispersion
74 ps/nm
NA
Optical attenuation range
0 - 12 dB
10 - 24 dB
Minimum optical return loss of the cable plant at point S

including the optical connector
NA
24 dB
-28 dBm
-28 dBm
Overload (min)
-8 dBm
-8 dBm
Optical path penalty
< 1 dB
< 1 dB
Optical return loss of the receiver (min)
NA
27 dB
Optical path between points S and R

-10
STM-16
STM-16 SFPs:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-53
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Optical wavelength range
1266 - 1360 nm
1260 - 1360 nm
1280 - 1335 nm
1500 - 1580 nm
Transmission rate
2 488 320 kbit/s
2 488 320 kbit/s
2 488 320 kbit/s
2 488 320 kbit/s

Source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Max. spectral 20 dB width
NA
1 nm
1 nm
1 nm
Max. spectral RMS width
4 nm
NA
NA
NA
Min. side mode suppression
NA
30 dB
30 dB
30 dB
-3 dBm
0 dBm
3 dBm
3 dBm
10 dBm
5 dBm
2 dBm
2 dBm{
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
8.2dB
Mask of the eye diagram of

the optical transmit signal
see G.957
see G.957
see G.957
see G.957
Max. chromatic dispersion
12 ps/nm
NA
NA
1600 ps/nm
Optical attenuation range
0 { 7 dB
0 { 12 dB
12 { 24 dB
12 { 24 dB
Max. discrete reflectance
27 dB
-27 dB
27 dB
27 dB
Minimum optical return loss

of the cable plant at point S
including the optical
connector
24 dB
24 dB
24 dB
24 dB
Min. optical sensivity (BER

= 1 10 -10)
18 dBm
18 dBm
27 dBm
28 dBm
Min. optical sensivity (BER

= 1 10 -12)
17 dBm
17 dBm
26 dBm
27 dBm
Max. optical path penalty
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB
2 dB
Overload (min.)
3 dBm
0 dBm
9 dBm
9 dBm
Min. return loss at receiver,

measured at R
27 dB
27 dB
27 dB
27 dB
Optical path between S and R
1000BASE-SX SFP
The characteristics of the 1000BASE-SX SFP are summarized in the table below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-54
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1000BASE-SX pluggable optic (850 nm short haul, multi-mode) uses a Low
Power Laser (laser class 1/1 according to FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 & 1040 / IEC
60825). The 1000BASE-SX pluggable optic complies with IEEE 802.3-2000 Clause
38. The following table describes the various operating ranges for the 1000BASE-SX
pluggable optic over each optical fiber type.
Fiber Type
Modal Bandwidth @ 850 nm (min.

overfilled launch) (MHz x km)
Minimum range (m)
62.5 m MMF
160
2 ... 220
62.5 m MMF
200
2 ... 275
50 m MMF
400
2 ... 500
50 m MMF
500
2 ... 550
The following table lists the specific optical characteristics for a 1000BASE-SX
pluggable optic.
Application
1000BASE-SX
Bit rate
1.25Gb/s +/- 100ppm
770 - 860 nm
Transmitter characteristics
Transmitter type
Shortwave Laser
Trise/T fall (max, 2080%, > 830 nm)
0.26 ns
Trise/T fall (max, 2080%, 830 nm)
0.21 ns
0.85 nm
Average launch power (max)
-1.1 dBm (Class 1 safety limit as defined by

IEEE 802.32000 Clause 38.7.2)
Average launch power (min)
9.5 dBm
Average launch power of OFF transmitter (max)
30 dBm
9 dB
RIN (max)
117 dB/Hz
see IEEE802.3
Receive characteristics
Average receive power (max)
Receive sensitivity (min) @ BER = 1 10
0 dBm
-12
17 dBm
Return loss (min)
12 dB
Stressed receive sensitivity
12.5 dBm (62.5 m MMF)
(measured with conformance test signal at TP3 for BER =

1012 at the eye center)
13.5 dBm (50 m MMF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-55
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table lists the worst-case power budget and link penalties for a
1000BASE-SX pluggable optic. Link penalties are used for link budget calculations.
Description
Unit
62.5 m
MMF
50 m MMF
Modal bandwidth as measured at

850 nm (minimum, overfilled
launch)
MHz
km
160
200
400
500
Link power budget
dB
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
Operating distance
220
275
500
550
Channel insertion loss (a

wavelength of 830 nm is used to
calculate the values)
dB
2.38
2.60
3.37
3.56
Link power penalties (a

wavelength of 830 nm is used to
dB
4.27
4.29
4.07
3.57
Unallocated margin in link power

budget (a wavelength of 830 nm
is used to calculate the values)
dB
0.84
0.60
0.05
0.37
1000BASE-LX SFP
The following table lists the specific optical characteristics for a 1000BASE-LX
pluggable optic.
The 1000BASE-LX pluggable optic uses a Low Power Laser (laser class 1/1 according
to FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 & 1040 / IEC 60825). The 1000BASE-LX pluggable
optic complies with IEEE 802.3-2000 Clause 38. The table below describes the various
operating ranges for the 1000BASE-LX pluggable optic over each optical fiber type.
Fiber Type
Modal Bandwidth @ 1300 nm

(min. overfilled launch)
(MHz km)
Minimum range
(meters)
10 m SSMF
N/A
2 to 5000
The following table lists the specific optical characteristics for a 1000BASE-LX
pluggable optic.
Application
1000BASE-LX
Bit rate
1.25Gb/s +/-100ppm
1270 - 1355 nm
Transmitter characteristics
Transmitter type
T
rise
/T
fall
(max, 2080%)
Longwave Laser
0.26 ns
4 nm
Average launch power (max)
-3 dBm
Average launch power (min)
-11 dBm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-56
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application
1000BASE-LX
Average launch power of OFF transmitter (max)
-30 dBm
9 dB
see IEEE802.3
RIN (max)
-117 dB/Hz
Receive characteristics
Average receive power (max)
Receive sensitivity (min) @ BER = 1 10
-3 dBm
-12
-19 dBm
Return loss (min)
12 dB
Stressed receive sensitivity
-14.4 dBm
(measured with conformance test signal at TP3 for BER = 1012

at the eye center)
The following table lists the worst-case power budget and link penalties for a
1000BASE-LX pluggable optic. Link penalties are used for link budget calculations.
Description
Unit
10 m SMF
Link power budget
dB
Operating distance
5000
Channel insertion loss (a wavelength of 1270 nm is used to

dB
4.57
Link power penalties (a wavelength of 1270 nm is used to

dB
3.27
Unallocated margin in link power budget (a wavelength of

1270 nm is used to calculate the values)
dB
0.16
1000BASE-ZX SFP
The following table lists the specific optical characteristics for a 1000BASE-ZX
pluggable optic.
The 1000BASE-ZX pluggable optic uses a Low Power Laser (laser class 1/1 according
to FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 & 1040 / IEC 60825). The 1000BASE-ZX pluggable
optic complies with IEEE 802.3-2002 Clause 38. The following table lists the specific
optical characteristics for a 1000BASE-ZX pluggable optic.
Application
1000BASE-ZX
Bit rate
1.25Gb/s +/-100ppm
1500-1580 nm
Transmitter at reference point TP2

Source type
SLM
Spectral width at 20dB
1.0 nm
30dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-57
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application
1000BASE-ZX
+5 dBm
0 dBm
9.0 dB
Mask of the eye diagram of the optical transmit

signal
see IEEE802.3
RIN (max)
-120 dB/Hz
Optical path between points TP2 and TP3

Optical return loss of the cable plant at point TP2
including the optical connector
20 dB
Maximum dispersion
1600 ps/nm
Attenuation range
5 - 21 dB
Optical path penalty (max)
1.5 dB
Receiver at reference point TP3

-12
-22.5 dBm
Overload (min)
0 dBm
Optical return loss of the receiver (min)
12 dB
CWDM SFPs
CWDM STM-4/16 SFPs:
Application
CWDM STM-4/16 40km
CWDM STM-4/16 80km
Maximum channels
Maximum output power
+5 dBm
+5 dBm
Minimum output power
0 dBm
0 dBm
Operating wavelength
1471 nm +20m (m = 0 to 7)
1471 nm +20m (m = 0 to 7)
Maximum central wavelength

deviation
+/- 6.5 nm
+/- 6.5 nm
Minimum extinction ratio
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
Eye mask pattern
see G.957
see G.957
Interface at point SS
Optical path between point SS and RS

Maximum channel insertion loss
17 dB
25.5 dB
Minimum channel insertion loss
5 dB
13 dB
Maximum dispersion
1000 ps/nm
1640 ps/nm
Minimum optical return loss at

SS
24 dB
24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance

between SS and RS
27 dB
27 dB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-58
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Application
CWDM STM-4/16 40km
CWDM STM-4/16 80km
Maximum differential group

delay
120 ps
120 ps
Maximum optical cross talk
20 dB
20 dB
Maximum mean channel input

power
0 dBm
-8 dBm
Minimum sensitivity
-18.5 dBm
-28 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
1.5 dB
2.5 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
27 dB
27 dB
Interface at point RS
Single-fiber Bidirectional SFPs
STM-1, STM-4, 1 GbE Single-Fiber (Bidirectional) Short Haul optical modules (SFPs).
Unit
Application
Value
Downstream
S-1.2/S-4.2
Downstream
1000BASEBX10-D
Upstream
S-1.1/S-4.1
Upstream
1000BASEBX10-U
Data rate
Mbit/s
155/622
1250
155/622
1250
Target distance
km
15
20
15
20
Transmitter at reference point S / TP2

Source type
SLM
SLM
Wavelength
nm
1480 - 1500
1260 - 1360
Max. spectral width at

-20 dB
nm
Mean launched power

(max)
Mean launched power
(min)
dBm
-6
-6
Maximum mean
launched power in case
Tx_Disable = high
dBm
-45
-45
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
Transmitter eye mask

definition
see G.957
see Table 59-6,

IEEE802.3ah
see G.957
see Table 59-6,

IEEE802.3ah
Maximum reflectance of
transmitter, measured at
S / TP2
dB
NA
-12
NA
-12
Maximum optical path

penalty / Maximum
transmitter and
dispersion penalty
dB
3.3
3.3
Optical path between S / TP2 and R / TP3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-59
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unit
Value
Application
Downstream
S-1.2/S-4.2
Downstream
1000BASEBX10-D
Upstream
S-1.1/S-4.1
Upstream
1000BASEBX10-U
Data rate
Mbit/s
155/622
1250
155/622
1250
Target distance
km
15
20
15
20
Available power budget

(BER = 1 10 -10)
dB
13.5
13.5
Available power budget

(BER = 1 10 -12)
dB
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
Minimum attenuation
dB
Maximum dispersion
ps/nm
275
275
132
132
Receiver at reference point R / TP3

Operating wavelength
range
nm
1260 - 1360
1480 - 1500
Minimum sensitivity (@
BER = 1 10-12)
dBm
-19.5
-19.5
-19.5
-19.5
Minimum overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance of
receiver, measured at R
/ TP3
dB
-12
-12
The following table lists the STM-1 and STM-4 Single-Fiber (Bidirectional) Long Haul
optical interface parameters.
Unit
Application
Value
Downstream
Upstream
Tx: L-1.2/L-4.2
Rx: L-1.1/L-4.1
Tx: L-1.1/L-4.1
Rx: L-1.2/L-4.2
Data rate
Mbit/s
155/622
155/622
Target distance
km
40
40
EOL
EOL
SLM
SLM
nm
1480 - 1580
1280 - 1335
maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
30
30

Source type
Nominal center
wavelength
Spectral characteristics
Mean launched power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-60
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unit
Application
Value
Downstream
Upstream
Tx: L-1.2/L-4.2
Rx: L-1.1/L-4.1
Tx: L-1.1/L-4.1
Rx: L-1.2/L-4.2
Data rate
Mbit/s
155/622
155/622
Target distance
km
40
40
- maximum
dBm
+2
+2
- minimum
dBm
-5
-3
Maximum mean
launched power in
case
dBm
-45
-45
dB
10
10
see G.957
see G.957
-12
-12
Tx_Disable = high
Minimum
extinction ratio
Transmitter eye
mask definition
Maximum
reflectance of
transmitter,
measured at S
dB
Optical path between S and R

Maximum
attenuation (at a
BER = 1 10-10)
dB
22
24
Minimum
attenuation (at a
BER = 1 10 -10)
dB
10
10
Maximum
dispersion (absolute
value)
ps/nm
NA
172
Minimum optical
return loss of cable
plant at S,
including any
connectors
dB
24
24

Operating
wavelength range
nm
1260 - 1360
1480 - 1600
Minimum
sensitivity (at a
BER = 1 10-10)
dBm
-28
-28
Minimum overload
dBm
-8
-8
Maximum optical
path penalty
dB
-34
-34
Nominal LOS assert level

- maximum
dBm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-61
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unit
Application
Value
Downstream
Upstream
Tx: L-1.2/L-4.2
Rx: L-1.1/L-4.1
Tx: L-1.1/L-4.1
Rx: L-1.2/L-4.2
Data rate
Mbit/s
155/622
155/622
Target distance
km
40
40
- minimum
dBm
-40
-40
- maximum
dB
- minimum
dB
0.5
0.5
Maximum
reflectance of
receiver, measured
at R
dB
-12
-12
LOS hysteresis
FE 100BASE-LX10 interface
Unit
Application (IEEE802.ah)
Value
100BASE-LX10 single-mode
Data rate
MBd
125 +/- 50 ppm
Target distance
km
10
Transmitter at reference point TP2

Source type
MLM
Wavelength
nm
1260 - 1360
Spectral width RMS a
nm
7.7
dBm
-8
dBm
-15
Maximum mean launched power for Tx

disabled
dBm
-45
Minimum extinction ratio
dB
Transmitter eye mask definition (X1, X2,

X3, Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4)
UI
see Table 58-3, IEEE802.3ah
Rise and fall time (10% or 90%, unfiltered)
ns
tbd
Maximum transmitter total jitter (peak to

peak)
ns
3.2
Maximum optical return loss tolerance
dB
12
Maximum channel insertion loss b
dB
Minimum channel insertion lossb
dB
Minimum and maximum dispersion
ps/nm
see Table 58-12, IEEE802.3ah
Maximum transmitter and dispersion penalty
dB
4.5
Optical path between TP2 and TP3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-62
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unit
Value
Application (IEEE802.ah)
100BASE-LX10 single-mode
Data rate
MBd
125 +/- 50 ppm
Target distance
km
10
nm
1260 - 1360
dBm
-26
dBm
-25
Stressed receiver sensitivity
dBm
-20.1
Minimum overload
dBm
-8
Total jitter (peak to peak) at TP3
ns
3.54
Minimum LOS assert level
dBm
-45
Maximum LOS de-assert level
dBm
-25
LOS hysterisis (max)
dB
LOS hysterisis (min)
dB
0.5
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured

at TP3
dB
-12
Receiver at reference point TP3

Minimum sensitivity (@ BER = 1.0 10 -10)
Minimum sensitivity (@ BER = 1.0 10
-12
Note that this SFP can be only used with the ESW4_E14 S1:3 option card.
Electrical STM-1 interface
The following table lists some parameters and the End of Life power budget of the
155-Mbit/s electrical interface unit:
Unit
Application
Value
intra-office
SDH Level
type
STM-1
Transmission rate
kbit/s
155,520 20 ppm
Line coding
type
Coded Mark Inversion (CMI, G.703-12.1)
Impedance
75
Return Loss
dB
15
dB
12.7
(8 ... 240 MHz.)

Maximum cable attenuation (78 MHz)
Tributary interfaces
STM-1 tributary interface at 155 Mbit/s according to G.957 via SFP. The 155
Mbit/s optical access is done with a LC connector type.
STM-1 tributary interface at 155 Mbit/s according to the ITU G703-15 via SFP.
The STM-1e SFPs use the DIN 1.0/2.3 type connectors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-63
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STM-4 tributary interface at 622 Mbit/s according to G.957 via SFP. The 622
Mbit/s optical access is realized with a LC connector type.
Interface at 1.544 Mbit/s 130 ppm, AMI or B8ZS encoded (programmable in

groups of 8) and conforming to G.703-2 standard 1991, asynchronously mapped via
VC-11 to a TU-12. The 1.5 Mbit/s electrical (DS1) interface access is via a RJ45
connector suitable for symmetrical twisted pair cables with an impedance of 100 .
Interface at 2.048 Mbit/s 50 ppm, HDB3 coded and conforming to G.703

standard 1991, asynchronously mapped via a VC-12 in TU-12. The 2 Mbit/s
electrical (E1) interface access is via RJ45 connector suitable for symmetrical
twisted pair cables either with an impedance of 120 or coaxial cables with an
impedance of 75 .
Each 2 Mbit/s tributary interface (optional card) can be operated in ISDN PRI
(Primary Rate Interface) or Leased-Line mode. It allows to transmit 30 B+D
according to G.962 and I.431. This feature requires the processing of the overhead
contained in timeslot 0 (TS0) of the 2 Mbit/s signal.
Interface at 34.368 Mbit/s 20 ppm, HDB3 encoded and conforming to G.703-8

October 1998, asynchronously mapped into LO-VC3. The 34 Mbit/ s electrical
clear channel (E3) interface access is via a coaxial female DIN 1.6/5.6 type
connector with an impedance of 75 .
Interface at 44.736 Mbit/s 20 ppm, B3ZS encoded and conforming to G.703-6

October 1998, directly mapped in a LO-VC3. The 45 Mbit/s electrical tributary
(DS-3) interface access is via a coaxial female DIN 1.6/5.6 type connector with an
impedance of 75 .
A 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface (LAN interface) with Auto-negotiation
supporting Ethernet and IEEE 802.3, 1998 access protocols. Auto-negotiation of the
data rate (10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s) and of the mode (full duplex). The
10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface access is via a RJ45 connector.
A 1000BaseT Ethernet Interface (LAN interface) with Auto-negotiation supporting
Ethernet and IEEE 802.3, 1998 access protocols. Auto-negotiation of the mode (full
duplex). The 1000BaseT Ethernet Interface access is via a RJ45 connector.
A 1000BaseX Ethernet Interface (LAN interface) with Auto-negotiation supporting

Ethernet and IEEE 802.3, 2002 access protocols. Auto-negotiation of the mode (full
duplex). The 1000BaseX Ethernet Interface access is via LC connector.
The 1655 AMU supports an AU-4 <-> VC-4 <-> TUG-3 <-> TUG-2 <-> TU-12
<->VC-12 <->E1 mapping scheme for each VC-12 created and terminated in the
system
The 1655 AMU supports an AU-4 <-> VC-4 <-> TUG-3 <-> TUG-2 <-> TU-12
<-> VC-11 <->DS1 mapping scheme for each VC-11 created and terminated in the
system
Mapping
The 1655 AMU supports an AU-4 <-> VC-4 <-> TUG-3 <-> TU-3 <-> VC-3
<->E3 mapping scheme for each VC-3 created and terminated in the system
The 1655 AMU supports an AU-4 <-> VC-4 <-> TUG-3 <-> TU-3 <-> VC-3 <->
DS3 mapping scheme for each VC-3 created and terminated in the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-64
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead bytes processing
The next table describes the Section Overhead (SOH) processing functions.
Overhead bytes
A1-A2
Function
Processing
Framing A1=11110110 (HF6)
Yes
Framing A2=00101000 (H28)

J0
Regenerator section trace

identifier
Yes
C1
Regenerator section trace

Trace/frame identifier
Fixed to 00000001
B1
RS Bit error monitoring (BIP-8)
No
B2
MS Bit error monitoring (BIP-8)
Yes
D1 to D12
Data communication channel

(DCC) D1 to D3 or D4 to D12
can be selected
Yes
E2
Codirectional interfaces at 64
kbit/s (J64), in accordance with
G.703 (Service channel)
Yes
F1
64 kbit/s user channel
Fixed to 11111111
K1, K2 (bit 1 to 5)
Automatic Protection Switching

(APS) channel for MSP
Yes
K2 (bit 6 to 8)
Remote alarm MS (MS-FERF)
Yes
S1
Synchronization state
Yes
M1
Remote error indication MS

(MS-REI)
Yes
Z1, Z2
Reserved
Fixed to 11111111
NU
National use
11111111
The next table describes the Path Overhead (POH) processing functions for VC-12
transmission.
Overhead bytes
Function
Processing
V5 (bit 1 to 2)
VC-12 BIP-2 error checking
Yes
V5 (bit 3)
REI path (FEBE)
Yes
V5 (bit 4)
RFI path
Fixed to 0
V5 (bit 5 to 7)
Label of VC-12 path
Yes
V5 (bit 8)
RDI path (FERF)
Yes
J2
VC-12 Trace identifier
Yes
Z6
Connection/monitoring
Fixed to 0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-65
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead bytes
Function
Processing
K4 (bit 1 to 4)
VC-12 APS path
Fixed to 0
K4 (bit 5 to 6)
Reserved
Fixed to 0
Note that the POH processing for VC-11 transmission is available via the V5 (bit 3)
overhead byte for REI functions.
The next table describes the POH processing functions for VC-3 transmission.
Overhead bytes
Function
Processing
J1
VC3 trace identifier
Yes
B3
Path bit error monitoring

(BIP-8)
Yes
C2
Path signal label
Yes
G1
REI/RDI path
Yes
F2
User channel
Fixed to 0
F3
User channel
Fixed to 0
H4
Provides a general
multiframe indicator for
VC-structured payloads.
Provides a multiframe and
sequence indicator for
virtual VC-3 concatenation
and LCAS
Fixed to 11111111
K3 (bit 1 to 4)
VC-4 APS path
Fixed to 0
K3 (bit 5 to 6)
Reserved
Fixed to 0
Z5
Network control
Fixed to 0
The next table describes the POH processing for VC-4 transmission.
Overhead bytes
Function
Processing
J1
VC4 trace identifier
Yes
B3
VC-4 BIP-8 path
Yes
C2
VC-4
Yes
G1
REI/RDI path
Yes
F2
User channel
Fixed to 0
F3
User channel
Fixed to 0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-66
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead bytes
Function
Processing
H4
Provides a general multiframe

indicator for VC-structured
payloads. Provides a multiframe
and sequence indicator for virtual
VC-4 concatenation and LCAS
Yes
K3 (bit 1 to 4)
VC-4 APS path
Fixed to 0
K3 (bit 5 to 6)
Reserved
Fixed to 0
Z5
Network control
Fixed to 0
The next table describes the POH processing for VC-4-4c transmission.
Overhead bytes
Function
Processing
J1
VC-4-4c trace identifier
Yes
B3
VC-4-4C access, Degraded

Signal Threshold (DEG),
BIP-8 path
Yes
C2
VC-4-4c Path signal label
Yes
G1
REI/RDI path
Yes
Note: The ISDN feature requires the processing of the overhead contained in timeslot 0
(TS0) of the 2 Mbit/s signal.
Power supply specifications
The power consumption of a fully equipped 1655 AMU 2m/4o system remains
below 160 watts.
The power consumption of a fully equipped 1655 AMU 1m/1o system remains
below 55 watts.
The system optionally supports the grounding philosophy according to ETSI

Requirements 300 253, January 1995 (battery return connected to ground).
Power supply 1655 AMU:
The following possibilities are available:
Voltage range DC: 48 VDC and 60 VDC (39 VDC minimum, 72 VDC
maximum).
Three external AC/DC converters to enable AC applications.

The following external AC/DC converters are available:
AC/DC converter 90~230V 50~60Hz 75W (CC: 408965325)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-67
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power consumption
The following table lists the power consumption for the system components of 1655
AMU.
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
Typical
[W]
Maximum
[W]
1655 AMU subrack 2m/4o, vertical

mount
ASH101
109509752
N/A
N/A
1655 AMU subrack 1m/1o, horizontal

and vertical mount
ASH102
109509778
N/A
N/A
1655 AMU main card - MI-14/4
ASC101B
109555516
10
12.5
ASC110
109588954
15
20
1655 AMU option card 63 E1 120
ASC102
109509679
8.6
10.2
ASC104
109535468
8.8
11.3
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 optional 2 E/FE, 2 FE/GE and 4 E1(120

or 75 ) interfaces
ASC105
109543504
12.5
14.5
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 optional 4 E/FE and 32 E1 (120 )
ASC106
109543512
14.4
15.4
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 optional 4 E/FE and 32 E1 (75 )
ASC107
109543520
14.5
16
1655 AMU Ethernet option card, E1 - 2

E/FE, 2 E/FE/GE interfaces and 4
(75/120 Ohm) interfaces, 8 WAN ports
ASC108
109579896
28
32
1655 AMU option card, 8 STM-1 or 2

STM-4
ASC109
109579904
10
1655 AMU option card 3X E3/3X DS3

AND 4XE1 (75 AND 120 )
ASC111
109655225
10
12
1655 AMU Main Card STM-4/16 1-port
ASC114
109655225
15
20
1655 AMU EOP4_E132 (120 ) option

card
ASC112
109683508
21
26
1655 AMU EOP4_E132_75 (75 )

option card
ASC113
109683516
21
26
AMU AC-1
109509653
4.5
1655 AMU Fan
ASH104
109509786
3.5
1655 AMU spare Fan for 6H subrack

(spare part)
ASF101
109667840
13
22
1655 AMU spare Fan for 2H subrack

(spare part)
ASF102
109667857
10
1655 AMU Adapter card for legacy

option card support in 1655 AMU 2m/4o
subrack (occupies two slots in subrack)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-68
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table lists the power consumption for the SFPs used with 1655 AMU.
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
Typical
[W]
Maximum
[W]
1655 AMU STM-1 S1.1 SFP short

range
OM155T101
109469809
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-1 L1.1 SFP

middle range
OM155T103
109469825
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-1 L1.2 SFP long

range
OM155T102
109469817
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-4 S4.1 SFP short

range
OM622T101
109509687
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-4 L4.1 SFP

middle range
OM622T102
109509695
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-1 L4.2 SFP long

range
OM622T103
109509703
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-1 electrical SFP
OM155T104
109543561
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-1 1490, single

fiber bidirectional
OM155T105
109559492
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-1 1310, single

fiber bidirectional SFP
OM155T106
109559500
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-16 Intra-office

optical SFP - (V16.1) 1310nm, 2
km
OM2G5T101
109509711
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-16 short haul

optical SFP - (S16.1) 1310nm, 15
km
OM2G5T102
109509729
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-16 long haul

optical SFP - (L16.1) 1310nm, 40
km
OM2G5T103
109509737
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-16 long haul

optical SFP - (L16.2/3) 1550nm,
80 km
OM2G5T104
109509745
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-16 Short Haul, 8

channel CWDM - SFP STM-4/16
CWDM SH 40km
OMWDMT101
109620385
1.0
1.2

CWDM SH 40km
OMWDMT102
109620393
1.0
1.2

CWDM SH 40 km
OMWDMT103
109620401
1.0
1.2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-69
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
Typical
[W]
Maximum
[W]

CWDM SH 40 km
OMWDMT104
109620419
1.0
1.2

CWDM SH 40 km
OMWDMT105
109620427
1.0
1.2

CWDM SH 40 km
OMWDMT106
109620435
1.0
1.2

CWDM SH 40 km
OMWDMT107
109620443
1.0
1.2

CWDM SH 40 km
OMWDMT108
109620450
1.0
1.2

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT109
109620468
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU SFP STM-4/16

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT110
109620476
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU STM-16 Long Haul, 8

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT111
109620484
1.0
1.2

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT112
109620492
1.0
1.2

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT113
109620500
1.0
1.2

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT114
109620518
1.0
1.2

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT115
109620526
1.0
1.2

CWDM LH 80 km
OMWDMT116
109620534
1.0
1.2
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP,

ZX 1550 nm
OMGBET103
109534347
1.0
1.2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-70
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
Typical
[W]
Maximum
[W]

LX 1300 nm
OMGBET102
109526491
1.0
1.2

SX 850 nm
OMGBET101
109526483
1.0
1.2
OM622T105 STM-1/4 BiDi 1310

nm upstream 40KM
OM622T105
109671446
1.0
1.2
OM622T106 STM-1/4 BiDi 1550

nm downstream 40KM
OM622T106
109671438
1.0
1.2
Supervision interface
F-interface for Craft Interface Terminal via RJ45 connector with metal shell for
grounding (ITM-CIT)
The interface conforms to V.10/RS-232C standards.
Q-LAN Interface via RJ45 connector with metal shell for grounding
(Ethernet-10BASE-T)
This interface conforms to IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standards.
Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs/Outputs
The user can assign, through the EMS or local workstation, an alarm message and
alarm severity to each of the four miscellaneous discrete inputs (MDIs). They are
equivalent to other system alarms.
When receiving power, all four miscellaneous discrete outputs (MDOs) are
normally open. If power is lost, MDO 1s contacts close (assigned to indicate
power failure). MDO 2-4 are respectively assigned to Prompt alarm, Deferred
alarm and Information alarm.
The MDI inputs and MDO outputs are available from a 25 pin SUB-D male
connector.
Easy MDI
The 1655 AMUsupports two types of MDI; an external version which requires 18-72V
voltage and an Easy version which does not require a power source. The external
physical interface supports four floating MDIs and four non-floating (Easy) MDIs
simultaneously. The MDIs can be floating and non-floating with respect to system
ground. However, the Easy MDIs are not connected to ground. There is also no pin
sharing between the floating MDIs and the easy MDIs. Activation of the floating MDI
requires an external voltage in the range of 18-72 V (Imax of 4mA by one input).
For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Installation
Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-71
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental conditions
The environmental conditions applicable to the 1655 AMU are:
Storage compliant with ETSI 300 019-1-1 Class 1-2, February 1992:
- Temperature range -5C to +45C
- Humidity of 5 to 90% without condensation.
Transport compliant with ETSI 300 019-1-2 Class 2-3, February 1992:
- Temperature range -5C to +45C
- Humidity of 5 to 90% without condensation.
The system normally operates with convectional cooling. In specific configurations,
fan cooling is used. For more information about when a fan is recommended, see
Guidelines for Fan usage (p. 2-72).
CE marking compliant EC2004.108/EEC
ETSI EMC - The system meets the requirements of EN 300 386-2 V.1.1.3
(december 1997) for equipment installed in locations other than telecom centers.
IEC 60950 -Ed3, 1994-04
Optical safety compliant with IEC 60825-1 Ed 1.1 (1998/01) and IEC 60825-2 Ed
2 (2000/05).
The street cabinet units require dust free environment. No air filter is provided.
Therefore, the environment must be sufficiently dust-free. The maximum dust
suspension level is as specified by ETSI 300-019-1-3 paragraph 5.4 (0,2 mg/m3).
The following table shows the environmental conditions for the 1655 AMU.
Power Type
Min Temp.
Max
Temp
Min
Hum.
Max
Hum
Compliant to ETS 300 019-1-3 Of

February. 1992 & Amendment A1 June
1997
DC
-5
+45
5%
90%
Class 3.1E
AC
-5
+45
5%
90%
Class 3.1E
Installation operations in street cabinets are supported, when they provide the required
environmental conditions.
Important! Ensure that the 1655 AMU units have reached room temperature and
are dry before taking them into operation.
For further information, please refer to the 1655 AMU Installation Guide.
Guidelines for Fan usage
Some option cards in certain hardware configurations require a fan (ASH104) unit
being installed. The tables below provide an overview when a fan unit is mandatory
for both ETSI class 3.1 and ETSI class 3.1E conditions as specified in ETS 300
019-1-3. For specific installation instructions, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer
Universal AMU, Release 6.0, Installation Guide (365-312-848R6.0, Comcode
109686931).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-72
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table indicates option cards that require mandatory fan unit usage for
ETSI class 3.1 compliant environmental conditions.
Option card
1m/1o shelf
horizontal
mounting
(ASH102)
1m/1o shelf
vertical
mounting
(ASH102)
2m/4o shelf
vertical
mounting
(ASH101)
1655 AMU
Subrack 6H
(2m/4o)
horizontal
mounting
(ASH111)
1655 AMU
Subrack 2H
(1m/1o)
horizontal
mounting
(ASH112)
EPL4_E14
(ASC105)
No fan
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
EPL4_E132_ No fan
75 - 75
(ASC107)
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
ESW4_E14
(ASC108)
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
SI-14/8
(ASC109)
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
EOP4_E132
(120 )
(ASC112)
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
EOP4_E132_ Fan usage 75 (75 )

Mandatory
(ASC113)
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Other cards
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
The following table indicates option cards that require mandatory fan unit usage for
ETSI class 3.1E compliant environmental conditions.
Option card
1m/1o shelf
horizontal
mounting
(ASH102)
1m/1o shelf
vertical
mounting
(ASH102)
2m/4o shelf
vertical
mounting
(ASH101)
1655 AMU
Subrack 6H
(2m/4o)
horizontal
mounting
(ASH111)
1655 AMU
Subrack 2H
(1m/1o)
horizontal
mounting
(ASH112)
EPL4_E14
(ASC105)
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
EPL4_E132_ Fan usage Mandatory

75 (75 )
(ASC107)
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
ESW4_E14
(ASC108)
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-73
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SI-14/8
(ASC109)
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
EOP4_E132
(ASC112)
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
EOP4_E132_ Fan usage Mandatory

75 (75)
(ASC113)
No fan
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Other cards
No fan
No fan
Fan usage Mandatory
Fan usage Mandatory
No fan
Overview
Performance monitoring is in accordance with ITU-T G.826 and G.784

The following four parameters are available to estimate the error performance of a
path:
SES: number of Severely Errored Seconds in the received signal

ES: number of Errored Seconds in the received signal
BBE: number of Background Block Errors in the received signal
UAS: number of UnAvailable Seconds in the received signal

For maintenance applications, the 1655 AMU supports the counting, threshold
monitoring, and logging of all the parameters mentioned above for the incoming
traffic direction (or unidirectional near-end performance monitoring). The
performance monitoring points are listed below.
For operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning, the possible
unidirectional monitoring points are:
VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 Trail Termination Points (TTPs)

MS-1, MS-4, MS-16 termination points
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-4-4c Connection Termination Points (CTPs), also

referred to as non-intrusive monitoring
The possible bidirectional monitoring points are:
VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 Trail Termination Points (TTPs)
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, and VC-4-4c Connection Termination Points (CTPs), also
referred to as non-intrusive monitoring
The current performance monitoring data is displayed in a 15 minutes counter and
a 24 hour counter. The ITM-CIT users have access to the current PM bins.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-74
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Threshold reports are generated when performance parameters set by users exceed
15 minute and 24 hour periods
Ethernet performance monitoring information can be derived from the General

Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor, Ethernet Service Monitor, Ethernet Congestion
Monitor, Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor, Ethernet Low Priority Traffic
Monitor, and Ethernet Frame Delay Monitor. This information is available in 15
minutes or 24 hours registers. For more information about Ethernet Performance
Monitoring features, see Advanced TransLAN Features (p. 2-81).
Capacity for 200 monitoring points per tributary slot
In addition to the capacity limit (600) for the number of simultaneously active PM
points at the system level, there is a limit of 200 performance monitoring points for
each slot in the system. For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer
Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
Enhanced Ethernet performance monitoring
The ESW4_E14 option card provides enhanced Ethernet performance monitoring

functions.
The enhanced Ethernet performance monitoring functions are also available for the
802.3ah OAM Layer 1. This performance monitoring type can only be enabled when
the 802.3ah Link OAM is enabled.
Users can enable or disable the following Ethernet performance monitoring points.
General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor
Ethernet Service Monitor
Ethernet Congestion Monitor

Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor
Ethernet Low Priority Traffic Monitor
Round Trip Delay Monitor.
General purpose Ethernet monitor
The General Purpose Ethernet Monitor can be enabled or disabled on each LAN or
WAN port. The following counters are available in this monitor:
eINB: Number of octets in non-errored incoming frames

eINF: Number of non-errored incoming frames
eONB: Number of octets in outgoing frames
eONF: Number of outgoing frames

eINCP: Number of octets in non-errored incoming frames trapped to CPU
eONCP: Number of octets in outgoing frames sourced by CPU
eDFE: Number of incoming frames dropped due to frame format errors

eCIF: Number of incoming frames dropped due to capacity limits in switch input
stage
pUPR: Number of non-errored incoming unicast frames
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-75
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pMPR: Number of non-errored incoming multicast frames

pBPR: Number of non-errored incoming broadcast frames
pPPR: Number of non-errored incoming PAUSE frames
pUPS: Number of outgoing unicast frames

pMPS: Number of outgoing multicast frames
pBPS: Number of outgoing broadcast frames
pPPS: Number of outgoing PAUSE frames.
For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User
Operations Guide.
Threshold limit notifications for general purpose Ethernet monitor
Users can enable or disable threshold limit notifications for each active General
Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor on each of the following eight parameters.
eDFE - 15 minute bin
eCIF - 15 minute bin

eDFE - 24 hour bin
eCIF - 24 hour bin.
Each General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case one
of the thresholds is crossed while the threshold crossing is enabled, a corresponding
alarm will be raised or cleared for the chosen General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor.
Users can provision Set or Clear thresholds for each of these counters. Note that
this feature is only applicable in combination with the General Purpose Ethernet
Monitor features. For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal
AMU User Operations Guide.
Ethernet service monitor
The Ethernet service monitor can be enabled or disabled on each flow on a port on
which Flow Classification is enabled. The following three counters are included in this
monitor:
gQIB: Number of frames marked in green color (low dropping precedence)

yQIB: Number of frames marked in yellow color (high dropping precedence)
rQIB: Number of frames marked in red color (dropped immediately).
For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal User Operations
Guide.
Ethernet congestion monitor
The Ethernet Congestion Monitor can be enabled or disabled on each network role
egress port. The following counters are included in this monitor.
g0EDBC: Number of octets in dropped green frames with traffic class 0
y0EDBC: Number of octets in dropped yellow frames with traffic class 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-76
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

g2EOCS: Number of seconds with at least one dropped green frame of traffic class
2

y2EOCS: Number of seconds with at least one dropped yellow frame of traffic
class 2
g3EOCS: Number of seconds with at least one dropped green frame of traffic class
3
y3EOCS: Number of seconds with at least one dropped yellow frame of traffic
class 3.
Operations Guide.
Threshold limit notifications for Ethernet congestion monitor
Users can individually enable or disable threshold limit notifications for each active
Ethernet Congestion Monitor on the each of the following parameters.
g2EOCS - 15 minute bin
y2EOCS - 15 minute bin
g3EOCS - 15 minute bin

y3EOCS - 15 minute bin
g2EOCS - 24 hour bin
y2EOCS - 24 hour bin

g3EOCS - 24 hour bin
y3EOCS - 24 hour bin.
Note that this feature is only applicable in combination with the Ethernet Congestion
Monitor features.
Operations Guide.
Ethernet high priority traffic monitor
The Ethernet high priority traffic monitor can be enabled or disabled on each ingress
network role port. The following counters are included in this monitor.
g3EINB: Number of octets in non-errored incoming green frames with traffic class
3
g3EINF: Number of non-errored incoming green frames with traffic class 3

c3EIN: Number of octets in non-errored green frames with traffic class 3 and
internal protocol traffic, including encapsulation overhead (i.e. on the physical
layer)
i3gEILS: Number of seconds marked loaded in C3EIN count
i3gEISLS: Number of seconds marked severely loaded in C3EIN count
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-77
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
y3EINB: Number of octets in non-errored incoming yellow frames with traffic class
3
y3EINF: Number of non-errored incoming yellow frames with traffic class 3
2

c2EIN: Number of octets in non-errored green frames with traffic class 2, 3 and
internal protocol traffic, including encapsulation overhead (i.e. on the physical
layer)
i32gEILS: Number of seconds marked loaded in C2EIN count

i32gEISLS: Number of seconds marked severely loaded in C2EIN count
2
y2EINF: Number of non-errored incoming yellow frames with traffic class 2.
Note that a one second interval performance counter is marked Loaded in case the
counter increments more than the provisioned Loaded Second (LS) threshold during
this second. A one second interval on a performance counter is marked Severely
Loaded in case the counter increments more than the provisioned Severely Loaded
Second (SLS) threshold during this second. For more information about Loaded
Second and Severely Loaded Second, refer the following sections.
Operations Guide.
Ethernet low priority traffic monitor
The Ethernet Low Priority Traffic Monitor can be enabled or disabled on each ingress
network role port. The following counters are included in this monitor.
0

0
y0EINF: Number of non-errored incoming yellow frames with traffic class 0

1
1
y1EINF: Number of non-errored incoming yellow frames with traffic class 1.
For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal User Operations
Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-78
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Threshold limit notifications for Ethernet high priority traffic monitor
Users can individually enable or disable threshold crossing notifications for each active
Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor on each of the following parameters.
i3gEILS - 15 minute bin
i3gEISLS - 15 minute bin
i32gEILS - 15 minute bin

i32gEISLS - 15 minute bin
i3gEILS - 24 hour bin
i3gEISLS - 24 hour bin

i32gEILS - 24 hour bin
i32gEISLS - 24 hour bin.
Each Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case one
alarm is raised or cleared for the Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor in question.
Users can provision Set and Clear thresholds for each of these counters. Note that
this feature is only applicable to the Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor feature.
Operations Guide.
Provisionable LS/SLS threshold
Users can provision thresholds (between 0%-100%) to define a Loaded Second (LS)
and a Severely Loaded Second (SLS) for both C3EIN and C2EIN counters. One set of
provisioned LS/SLS thresholds (four values) can be provisioned for each Ethernet High
Priority Traffic Monitor. Different thresholds can be set to 15 minute and 24 hour
counters. Note that this feature is only applicable to the Ethernet High Priority Traffic
Monitor feature.
In combination with the LS and SLS provisioning in percentage, users can provision
the bandwidth to which the percentages are applied (in kbit/s per port), which
represents the 100% traffic load, when no VCAT or LAG members have failed. The
system automatically scales back the thresholds in case VCAT or LAG bandwidth is
temporarily lost. Note that this feature is only applicable to the Ethernet High Priority
Traffic Monitor feature.
Operations Guide.
Round Trip Delay Monitor
An Round Trip Delay Monitor can be enabled or disabled for a certain set of user
specified parameters which define an Ethernet Service Route. For each Ethernet
Service Route, a frame delay monitor can be enabled. The following counters are
included in this monitor.
mRTD: Minimum round-trip delay recorded in the binning period (milliseconds)
aRTD: Average round-trip delay over the binning period (milliseconds)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-79
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xRTD: Maximum round-trip delay recorded in the binning period (milliseconds)

p900RTD: Upper 90-percentile of round-trip delay over the binning period
(milliseconds)
p990RTD: Upper 99-percentile of round-trip delay over the binning period

(milliseconds)
p999RTD: Upper 99.9-percentile of round-trip delay over the binning period

(milliseconds)
sRTDM: Number of succesful RTD measurement frames transmitted

uRTDM: Number of unsuccesful RTD measurement frames transmitted.
Note that an RTD measurement frame is considered successful if a valid response

corresponding to the transmission frame was received from the targetted node.
Note that this feature is only applicable to the ESW4_E14 option card.
Operations Guide.
Threshold limit notifications for Round Trip Delay monitor
Users can individually enable or disable threshold limit notifications for each active
Round Trip Delay Monitor on any or each of the following parameters.
aRTD - 15 minute bin

xRTD - 15 minute bin
uRTDM - 15 minute bin
aRTD - 24 hour bin

xRTD - 24 hour bin
uRTDM - 24 hour bin.
Each Round Trip Delay Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case one of the
thresholds is crossed while the threshold limit is being enabled, a corresponding alarm
is raised or cleared for the Round Trip Delay Monitor. Users can provision Set and
Clear threshold limits for these counters. Note that this feature is only applicable to
the Round Trip Delay Monitor feature.
Ethernet Link Monitor
The 802.3ah based Ethernet Link Monitor can be enabled or disabled on each port on
which Link OAM is enabled .
The following eight counters are included in this monitor:
BSyE: Near-end Errored Symbol count
ES: Near-end Errored Second count

SES: Near-end Severely Errored Second count
UAS: Near-end Unavailable Second count
fEbSyE: Far-end Errored Symbol count

fEES: Far-end Errored Second count
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-80
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
fESES: Far-end Severely Errored Second count

fEUAS: Far-end Unavailable Second count
Threshold crossing notification
The user can individually enable or disable threshold crossing notifications (TR/RTR
type) for each active Ethernet 802.3ah Link OAM Monitor on each of the following
sixteen parameters:
BSyE (15 minute bin)

ES (15 minute bin)
SES (15 minute bin)
UAS (15 minute bin)

fEbSyE (15 minute bin)
fEES (15 minute bin)
fESES (15 minute bin)

fEUAS (15 minute bin)
BSyE (24 hour bin)
ES (24 hour bin)

SES (24 hour bin)
UAS (24 hour bin)
fEbSyE (24 hour bin)

fEES (24 hour bin)
fESES (24 hour bin)
fEUAS (24 hour bin)
Each Ethernet 802.3ah Link OAM Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case one
alarm is raised or cleared for the Ethernet 802.3ah Link OAM Monitor in question.
The user can provision both Set and Clear thresholds for each of these counters.

Ethernet performance monitoring (ESW4_E14)
Ethernet Performance Monitoring in SDH network elements is based on SDH

performance monitoring concepts. The following sections describe the advanced
TransLAN features that are implemented for Ethernet applications.
Round Trip Delay measurement (RTD)
The following features enable Round Trip Delay measurement:
One Shot Ethernet In-Service RTD Measurement - FROM Node
Continuous Ethernet In-Service RTD Measurement - FROM Node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-81
Issue 1 March 2009
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTD Measurement Accuracy

Proprietary Ethernet In-Service RTD Measurement
One shot Ethernet in-service RTD measurement - FROM Node
The virtual switches in the network element support proprietary in-service round trip
delay measurement by transmitting a special ping PDU from the local virtual switch
that is identified as the FROM Node to a remote switch that is identified as the TO
node. The TO node is identified by a MAC address. A ping frame with a defined
length can be sent with a certain VLAN, priority, and dropping precedence provisioned
by the user. Based on the responses from the remote node, the round trip time is
calculated. The result is presented to the user as a delay in milliseconds or a time-out.
Continuous Ethernet in-service RTD measurement - FROM Node
Users can provision a continuously repeating round trip delay measurement with the
following parameters.
FROM node virtual switch
TO node MAC address
Frame length
V-LAN
Traffic class
Dropping precedence
The repitition rate is approximately 45 seconds. The results are presented in the
Performance Monitoring format. For more information, refer the 1655 Access
Multiplexer Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
Proprietary Ethernet in-service RTD measurement - TO node
Protocol data units (PDUs) that are transmitted by a remote Ethernet switch for
in-service round trip measurement purposes (which are addressed to a local Ethernet
switch in the system) provide the appropriate response.
Static MAC address table configuration and retrieval
The following features support static MAC address table configuration and retrieval.
Manual unicast MAC address provisioning
Manual multicast MAC address provisioning

Delete/View dynamic entry from filtering database
Port security by S-MAC address based access list
Flushing the filtering database

Limited automatic MAC address learning capacity per VLAN
Provisionable MAC address ageing timer.
Manual unicast MAC address provisioning
Users can view, create, and delete a unicast MAC address to and from the filtering
database of an Ethernet switch unit. A unicast MAC address entry in the filtering
database consists of a unicast MAC address, a V-LAN entry, and a destination port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
2-82
Product description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Upon request, the user can view the entire list of provisioned static entries from the
filtering database of a switch unit. For more information, refer the 1655 Access
Multiplexer Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
Manual multicast MAC address provisioning
Users can view, create, and delete a multicast/broadcast MAC address to and from the
filtering database of an Ethernet switch unit. A multicast/broadcast MAC address entry
in the filtering database consists of the multicast/broadcast MAC address, a V-LAN
entry, and a destination port list. Upon request, the user can view the entire list of
provisioned static entries from the filtering database of a switch unit. This feature is
only applicable on the ESW4_E14 option card. For more information, refer the 1655
Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
Delete/View dynamic entry from filtering database
Users can search for specific and dynamically learnt MAC addresses or V-LAN entries
in the filtering database of an Ethernet switch unit. If the specified entry is present, the
associated destination port is displayed. When required, such an entry can be deleted
from the filtering database. This feature is only applicable to the ESW4_E14 option
card. For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User
Operations Guide.
Port security by S-MAC Address based Access List
Users can lock or unlock an Ethernet switch port. On a locked port, the automatic
address learning feature is disabled and all frames of the source MAC address that do
not appear in the access list are dropped. An access list from the filtering database of
the Ethernet switch is used. Before a frame is allowed to enter a locked port, the
source MAC address with the proper V-LAN number and port number must be present
in the filtering database.
Flushing the filtering database
When required, the user can delete all dynamically learnt addresses from the filtering
database of an Ethernet unit. For more information about this procedure, refer the 1655
Access Multiplexer Universal User Operations Guide. This feature is only applicable to
the ESW4_E14 option card. For more information, refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer
Universal AMU User Operations Guide.
Limited automatic MAC address learning capacity per V-LAN
Users can limit the number of MAC addresses that can be automatically learnt from
any static V-LAN to a number below the maximum capacity of the Ethernet switch.
Additionally, users can also retrieve a list of V-LANs with static registration on the
Ethernet unit with their respective limits.
Provisioning MAC address ageing timer
Users can provision the ageing timer for automatically learnt MAC addresses between
10 and 630 seconds (default 300s) in steps of 10 seconds. This timer value is common
for all virtual switches that are instantiated on the same TransLAN unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
2-83
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
3
Overview
Purpose
This chapter briefly describes the features of the 1655 AMU.

For more information on the physical design features and the applicable standards,
please refer to Chapter 2, Product description.
Standards compliance
Alcatel-Lucent SDH products comply with the relevant SDH ETSI and ITU-T
standards. Important functions defined in SDH standards such as the Data
Communication Channel (DCC), the associated 7-layer OSI protocol stack, the SDH
multiplexing structure and the Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and
Provisioning (OAM&P) functions are implemented in Alcatel-Lucent product families.
Alcatel-Lucent is heavily involved in various study groups with ITU-T, and ETSI
creating and maintaining the latest worldwide SDH standards. 1655 AMU comply with
all relevant and latest ETSI and ITU-T standards.
Contents
Physical interfaces
3-3
3-3
Data interfaces
3-5
Timing interfaces
3-5
3-6
3-6
Power interfaces
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet features
3-12
Auto-negotiation
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
Equipment features
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-22
Timing features
3-22
3-22
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
3-24
3-24
3-28
Overview
3-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-2
Features
Physical interfaces
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical interfaces
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about all kinds of external physical interfaces of the
1655 AMU. For detailed technical data and optical parameters of the interfaces please
refer to Technical specifications (p. 2-52).
The 1655 AMU supports a variety of additional interfaces that are dependent on the
use of an option card. The choice of the option cards and data interfaces described
below provide outstanding transmission flexibility and integration capabilities.
Contents
3-3
Data interfaces
3-5
Timing interfaces
3-5
3-6
3-6
Power interfaces
3-7
Pluggable modules
The 1655 AMU accepts multi-technology Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) devices
that can operate both with SDH and Ethernet optical specifications. The advantage is
that the system units can be equipped with generic receptacles that can remain
unequipped if an interface remains (initially) unused, or can be equipped with different
interface types. This helps to avoid the need to define different unit type-numbers for
each (combination of) interface types. In general, the flexibility of the systems is
enhanced by the introduction of pluggable modules. Various SFPs can exist, supporting
any subset of STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, optical FE and/or optical GbE. An SFP is
accepted in a port in case the bitrate/technology for which the port being provisioned is
supported by the multi-technology SFP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A receptacle for a pluggable module in the system can have three administrative states:
Administrative state
Description
MODULE ACCEPTED
When a pluggable module is inserted in a

receptacle and this module is recognized
or allowed in this location
MODULE REJECTED
When a pluggable module is inserted in a

receptacle and this module is not
recognizable or not allowed in this
location
MODULE NOT PRESENT
When a pluggable module is not present

in a receptacle
The system has the capability to automatically detect that a pluggable module is
present, not-present, removed or inserted in any of its receptacles.
A fault LED mounted on the unit remains operational when the pluggable module is
removed from the unit. During an fWUP, fUNI, fPM-EQF or fPM-UPF failure, a
dedicated LED for the respective pluggable module will be lit continuously. If the unit
does not have a dedicated LED for each pluggable module, the unit LED will be
continuously lit indicating an alarm.
SDH interface overview
1655 AMU supports the synchronous transmission rates STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16.
In the present release, STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 optical as well as STM-1 electrical
interface types can be realized in a modular way by only changing the SFP. Four ports
on one main card are available to plug an SFP. However, only two of the four ports are
available for STM-16 transmission.
PDH interface overview
1655 AMU 2m/4o and 1655 AMU 1m/1o provide PDH interfaces via an option card.
The following PDH interfaces can be configured via an option card:
Sixteen 1.5 Mbit/s interfaces (only 2m/4o version with adapter card)
Two 34 Mbit/s interfaces (only 2m/4o version with adapter card)
Two 45 Mbit/s interfaces (only 2m/4o version with adapter card)
Sixty-three times 2 Mbit/s (120 and 75 version available)

Four times 2 Mbit/s (120 and 75 ) at the EPL4_E14 option card
Thirty-two times 2 Mbit/s (75 ) at the EPL4_E132_75 and (120 ) at the

EPL4_E132 option cards
Four times 2 Mbit/s at the ESW4_E14 option card. For the E1 interfaces, (120
and 75 ) options are available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-4
Features
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thirty-two times 2 Mbit/s (120 ) at the EOP4_E132 and (75 ) at the

EOP4_E132_75 option cards
Three times 34 or 45 Mbit/s on DIN1.6/5.6 coaxial connectors and four E1

interfaces on RJ45 (2 E1 interfaces per RJ45) at the E3DS3/3_E14 option card.
Data interfaces
LAN interfaces
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports a variety of Ethernet interfaces, depending

on the option cards in use.
up to four 10/100BASE-T LAN interfaces, as part of the TransLAN Ethernet SDH

Transport Solution, at the X4IP option card (only 2m/4o version with adapter card)
up to eight Ethernet interfaces in Private Line mode at the X8PL option card (only
2m/4o version with adapter card).
up to two Ethernet/FastEthernet interfaces and two

Ethernet/FastEthernet/GigabitEthernet interfaces with optional SFP usage for
GigabitEthernet at the EPL4_E14 option card
up to four Ethernet/FastEthernet interfaces at the EPL4_E132_75 - 75 option

card
2 GE capable interfaces for either 10/100/1000 Base-T, 100 Base-X or 1000
Base-X and 2 E/FE interfaces 10/100 Base-T transmission rate at the ESW4_E14
option card.
Two 10/100 BaseT and two 10/100/1000 BaseT interfaces at the EOP4_E132 and
EOP4_E132_75 option cards.
Please note that legacy cards like X8PL and X4IP require a two-slot wide adapter card
to fit in the shelf.
Timing interfaces
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU provides one external timing input and
output per main card for ITU-T compliant 2MHz / 2Mb/s timing signals, see also
Timing interface features (p. 3-22). The timing output is realized as RJ45 connector
suitable for symmetrical twisted pair cables with an impedance of 120 or coaxial
cables with an impedance of 75 .
Real time information survival
The system contains a realtime clock cicuit which can survive a power outage of up to
10 minutes. In case the power is restored within this time, the Fault Management
(alarm event timestamping) and Performance Monitoring (binning, reporting, TCNs)
functions will continue without requiring user intervention.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Physical interfaces
Timing interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronization can be derived from the incoming STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16

aggregate signals and STM-1 or STM-4 tributary signals.
Synchronization can be derived from an incoming 2 Mbit/s (E1) data input.
Re-synchronization of the 2 Mbit/s ports is supported.
Support of SSM byte according to ETSI ETS 300 417-6.

External synchronization input at 2.048 MHz and 2 Mbit/s (STCLK, one per main
card) is according to G.703-10 via an RJ45 connector with an impedance of 120
symmetrical or with an impedance of 75 .
Internal Clock in accordance with ITU-T G.813 option 1.
V.11 interfaces
The 1655 AMU supports one Engineering Order Wire (EOW) interface with a 15 pin
sub-D connector on the faceplate. Regardless of the configuration, the EOW is
supported on Main-1 unit on line port 1 (LP1.1). The E2 channel is used to transfer the
EOW data.
Note: This interface is not supported on the 1655 AMU Main Card - MI-16/1
(Apparatus code: ASC114).
The 1655 AMU offers a wide range of operations interfaces to meet the needs of an
evolving Operations System (OS) network. The operation interfaces include:
Q-LAN interface
The Q interface enables network-oriented communication between 1655 AMU
systems and the element/network manager. This interface uses a Qx interface
protocol that is compliant with ITU-T recommendation G.773-CLNS1 to provide
the capability for remote management via the Data Communication Channels
(DCCs). The Q-LAN connector is either a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s (10/100
BASE-T) connector with automatic MDI/MDIX selection.
F interface for a local PC
One RJ-45 F-interface is provided, at the main board of the 1655 AMU
This interface provides operation access for a locally installed PC, the Craft
Interface Terminal (ITM-CIT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-6
Features
Physical interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
USB interface
The 1655 AMU provides two USB 1.1 interfaces labelled USB 1 and USB 2. Each
external USB interface provides upto 500mA at 5V to power external devices. An
overcurrent circuit protects the power outputs in case of short circuits; the
overcurrent condition can be read by the ITM-CIT. The USB controller also
supports 4 internal USB 1.1 ports which are used as control and management
interfaces via the backplane towards the tributary slots. The USB interface is
realized with a USB connector and is only used for internal system communication.
G-LAN interface
The 1655 AMU provides a G LAN interface to connect to the Ethernet port of the
PC (on which the Fast Download Tool is installed) for quick software download.
The G LAN interface supports the automatic MDI/MDIX function, so no crossover
cable is needed.
Miscellaneous Discrete Interfaces
The 1655 AMU provides 4 Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs (MDIs) and 4 outputs
(MDOs). The MDIs can be used to read the status of external alarm points, for
example, power supply detectors, open door detectors or fire alarm detectors. The
MDOs indicate the alarm status of the equipment and drive external signalling
devices. Labels can be associated to an MDI. An MDO can be coupled to an alarm
event.
The 1655 AMU provides 4 Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs (MDIs) and 4 outputs
(MDOs). The MDIs can be used to read the status of external alarm points, for
example, power supply detectors, open door detectors or fire alarm detectors. The
MDOs indicate the alarm status of the equipment and drive external signalling
devices. Labels can be associated to an MDI. An MDO can be coupled to an alarm
event.
Power interfaces
Optionally AC or DC powered
The 1655 AMU can optionally be AC powered or DC powered. However, the

realization of the power supply is slightly different.The unit has two 48V power
inputs and supports a full system load of 150W from a single 48V input. The 1655
AMU can only be AC powered by means of an external AC/DC converter.
DC power supply
The following table describes the DC power supply specifications.

1655 AMU
Nominal voltage range
48 V DC to 60 V DC
Permissible voltage range
39 V DC to 72 V DC
Voltage range AC (optional

AC/DC converter needed)
88 { 132 VAC or 176 { 264 VAC

(selectable by switch)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Physical interfaces
Power interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU
Power inputs
Power connector
Applicable standards
Two redundant power inputs that can protect each other.

The system can operate completely normal on only one
power feeder.
3-pin terminal block connector
ETS 300132-2
AC power supply
As an alternative to the DC power supply, an AC power supply can be facilitated via

an external AC/DC converter.
The following external AC/DC converters are available:


Important! To operate the 1655 AMU AC powered, an external AC/DC converter
is required.
Related information
Please also refer to the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Installation Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-8
Features
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section presents an overview of the transmission related features of the 1655
AMU. For more detailed information on the implementation of the switch function in
the NE please refer to Chapter 2, Product description.
Contents
3-9
3-10
3-12
Ethernet features
3-12
Auto-negotiation
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
Cross-connection rates
1655 AMU supports bidirectional cross-connections for VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, and
VC-4-4c transmission. The cross connect matrix is 100% flexible and non blocking.
The main unit supports loopbacks on VC-12, VC-3, VC-4 and VC-4-4c levels.
Transparent DCC cut-through
The MI-16/4 system supports up to 20 bi-directional connections for transparent DCC

forwarding through the system from one STM-N port to another. Each bi-directional
connection can support a transparent link for the DCC-RS or the DCC-MS or both
DCC channels associated with a single STM-N interface. However, note that only 20
bi-directional connections can be supported with a combination of the MI-16/4 main
unit and the Sl-14/8 unit.
The MI-14/4 system supports up to eight bidirectional connections for transparent DCC
forwarding through the system from STM-N port to another. Each connection can
support transparent link for the DCC-RS or the DCC-MS or both DCC channels
associated with a single STM-N interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-9
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The supported framing method is HDLC.

Please note that the same pool of connections that are available for Transparent DCC
cut-through is also required for connecting the DCC of an STM-N port to the internal
IS_IS router. This means a restriction on the number of available connections for DCC
cut-through purposes.
Slaved switching for MSP is applicable to transparent DCC cut-through connections.
The 1655 AMU cross-connection function provides the following DCC features.
Upto 40 MS-DCC and 40 RS-DCC terminations per system (4 from both main
units, 8 from each tributary slot); via 2 TDM ports and a separate TDM port for
in-band management channels. Users can access RS-DCC or MS-DCC or both
DCC channels of at most 16 different STM-N interfaces (including line and
tributary).
DCC support on STM-16 optical line interfaces via D1-3. The OSI layer 2 and 3
functionality is supported via the RS-DCC channel of the STM-16 optical line
interface. Each RS-DCC channel can be enabled or disabled individually.
DCC support on STM-16 optical line interfaces via D4-12. The OSI lsyer 2 and 3
functionality is supported via the MS-DCC channel of the STM-16 optical line
interface. Each MS-DCC channel can be enabled or disabled individually.
Supported protection mechanisms
To guarantee service availability, the following transmission protection mechanisms are

supported by the 1655 AMU:
Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) 1 + 1

1+1 MSP protection for optical and electrical STM-1 and optical
STM-4/STM-16 interfaces.
The protection switching can be configured as revertive and non-revertive, and
as unidirectional and bidirectional. The remote end of the Multiplex section
must support the necessary features for this operation. Any STM-N port
combination with the same transmission rate can be used as a combination of
line and tributary SDH ports.
The 1655 AMU supports Forced, manual and lockout switch commands. The
MSP implementation is compliant with the ITU-T Rec. G.841/Clause 7.1 and
ETS 300417-3-1. The APS protocol is optimized for 1:N protection. ETSI
failure of protocol applies to this NE. An alarm-free inter-working mode with
SONET defined MSP is also supported under this protocol.
The maximum switch completion time is 50 ms.
Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)
VC-12 SNC/N protection (non-revertive)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-10
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A non-intrusively monitored subnetwork connection protection (SNC/N) relation

can be set up between any arbitrary incoming TU-12 from any STM-N and any
other arbitrary incoming TU-12 from any STM-N interface (VC-12s are
mapped into TU-12s).
Only non-revertive operation is possible. The system supports manual and
forced switch commands. In the return channel the signal is simply bridged to
both outputs.
Lower order VC-3 SNC/N protection (non-revertive)
can be set up between any arbitrary incoming TU-3 from any STM-N interface
and any other arbitrary incoming TU-3 from any STM-N interface.
forced switch commands. In the return channel, the signal is simply bridged to
both outputs. note that hardware based SNCP switching for can be implemented
for lower order VC-12 and VC-3s.
Higher order VC-4 SNC/N protection (non-revertive)
can be set up between any arbitrary incoming TU-3 from any STM-N interface
and any other arbitrary incoming TU-3 from any STM-N interface.
forced switch commands. In the return channel, the signal is simply bridged to
both outputs.
Higher order VC-4-4c SNC/N protection (non-revertive)
can be set up between any arbitrary incoming AU-4-4c from any STM-N
interface.
forced switch commands. In the return channel the signal is simply bridged to
both outputs.
The hold-off time before an SNC/N protection switch can be set between 0.0 to
10.0 seconds. The maximum switch completion time is 50 ms.
Cascaded SNC/N protection
The cascaded subnetwork connection (SNC/N) protection is supported for lower
order VC12, VC3 cross-connects; higher order VC4, and VC4-4c.
The system allows to connect directly, within the cross-connect, the head-end of
one SNC/N protected pair to the tail-end of another SNC/N protected pair in
both directions of transmission.
In each direction of transmission, the incoming signal over the active link is
bridged to both the active and stand-by links in the outgoing direction.
The (virtual) connection point between both SNC/N sections is referred to as
the Z-point on the management systems. No fault management and performance
monitoring is supported on the Z-point.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-11
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported protection mechanisms
1655 Access Multiplexer Universal provides the following equipment protection

mechanisms (main board based)
1+1 revertive equipment protection of the cross-connection function
Equipment protection of the power supply filter function

Equipment protection of the timing function
Equipment protection of cross-connection and timing function
If two units are present in the system an automatic protection switch relation can be set
up by the user. The switching is revertive. This means that the service returns to the
Main board 2 when both boards are working. Manual operation of the protection is
supported and the unprotected operation is possible as well. The traffic interruption
time is less than 50 ms with manual switch commands and less than 50 ms plus the
detection time for automatic protection switches triggered by a failure. The unit that is
not active can be pulled or replaced without causing bit errors in the traffic.
Important! Please note that the CIT, EOW, Q-LAN and MDI/MDO interfaces on
the Main board 2 are not operational.
Equipment protection of the power filter function
If two units are present in the system, both power filter parts are active.
Ethernet features
Switched Ethernet Applications
The TransLAN ESW4_E14 option card can be used in any option card slot for
Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet applications.
Please refer to (p. 2-32) for a detailed description of the ESW4_E14 Ethernet option
card.
The X4IP option card can be used for Ethernet and Fast Ethernet applications in the
1655 AMU 2m/4o version (adapter card required).
Ethernet and Fast Ethernet applications
The X8PL option card can be used for Ethernet private line applications in 1655 AMU
2m/4o version (adapter card required).
Please refer to X8PL option card (legacy) (p. 2-48) for a more detailed description of
the X8PL option card.
The EPL4_E132_75 (ASC107) option card can be used for Ethernet private line
applications with the 1655 AMU 2m/4o and 1m/1o versions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-12
Features
Ethernet features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Please refer to (p. 2-26) and (p. 2-29) for a more detailed description of these
option cards.
The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards can be used for Ethernet over PDH
applications with the 1655 AMU 2m/4o and 1m/1o versions.
Please refer to EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards (p. 2-44) for a more
detailed description of these option cards.
Main features of the legacy option cards X4IP and X8PL
The following table lists the main features and differences of the two option cards
X4IP and X8PL which can be used for Ethernet applications:
X4IP
X8PL
4 ports
8 ports
provides a Layer 2 switch
no switch
supports advanced networking applications

like ring connections or point-to-multipoint connections
cost optimized option card for

point-to-point applications
no LCAS (Link capacity adjustment

scheme) support
supports the LCAS (Link Capacity

Adjustment Scheme) protocol (please refer
to LCAS (p. 3-15))
EoS (Ethernet over SDH) mapping or GFP

(Generic Framing Procedure)
GFP or LAPS (Link Access Procedure

SDH) (please refer to Ethernet mapping
schemes (p. 3-17))
Main Ethernet features of EPL4_E14 and EPL4_E132_75
The following table lists the main features and differences of the option cards
EPL4_E14 and EPL4_E132_75 besides PDH which can be used for Ethernet
applications:
EPL4_E14
EPL4_E132_75
4 ports:
4 ports:
two either optical (1000BASE-SX

SFP) or electrical triple rate
10/100/1000BASE-T
two dual rate 10/100BaseT
four dual rate 10/100BaseT
(Only two Gigabit-interfaces can be used

at the same time, switching between
modes only available from the Lucent
NMS.)
no switch
no switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-13
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Ethernet features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EPL4_E14
EPL4_E132_75
supports the LCAS protocol
supports the LCAS protocol
GFP and LAPS mapping of Ethernet

frames
GFP and LAPS mapping of Ethernet

frames
Supports the Link Pass Through (LPT)

mode
Supports the Link Pass Through (LPT)

mode
Supports loopbacks on outgoing FE/GbE

signals on electrical and optical ports
Supports loopbacks on outgoing FE/GbE

signals on electrical and optical ports
Main Ethernet features of ESW4_E14 option card
The main features of the ESW4_E14 option card are listed below.
2 GE capable interfaces for either 10/100/1000Base-T or 1000Base-X
2 E/FE interfaces for 10/100Base-T
4 E1 interfaces, 75/120
Enhanced Flow Classification
Upto 8 Virtual Concatenation Groups
Low latency LCAS

GFP + LAPS + PPP mapping of Ethernet frames
Supports VLAN and/or ETHER_TYPE switching and adding/removing VLAN tags

Supports loopbacks (only in repeater mode) on outgoing FE/GbE signals on
electrical and optical ports
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation
The Auto-negotiation function automatically configures the Ethernet interface

parameters to establish an optimal Ethernet link based on the capabilities of the
near-end and far-end Ethernet interfaces.
supported over twisted-pair cable: 10Mbit/s 10Base-T, 100Mbit/s 100Base- TX, and
1000 Mbit/s 1000Base-T.
The physical signaling portion of all three twisted-pair systems use the same
Auto-negotiation signaling standard. While Auto-negotiation can be disabled on
10Base-T and 100Base-TX links, it is required on 1000- Base-T systems since Gigabit
Ethernet systems use Auto-negotiation to establish the master-slave signal timing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-14
Features
Auto-negotiation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
control that is required to make the link operational. For more information about the
master-slave mode, please refer the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User
Operations Guide.
To be able to override the Auto-negotiation function, it is possible to disable
Auto-negotiation. This might be needed if Auto-negotiation cannot establish a link or if
a specific link speed / mode is required.

LCAS
The following option cards support the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS):
X8PL
EPL4_E14
EPL4_E132_75
ESW4_E14
EOP4_E132
EOP4_E132_75
LCAS defines a synchronization protocol between two termination points of a virtual

concatenated path that allows in-service dynamic sizing of the VCn-Xv bandwidth that
is available for Ethernet-over-SDH transmission. This bandwidth change can occur
either in response to a failure condition on one member or a requirement for a change
in bandwidth at an NE (provisioning action).
In case of failure, the bandwidth will be restored automatically after the failure clears.
The size of the VCn-Xv is increased or decreased in steps of one VCn. The
provisioning is performed by adding/removing paths to/from the Ethernet tributary
card.
The default LCAS hold-off timer is set to zero so that the LCAS mechanism will take
immediate action. However, if the path over which the LCAS protocol is run is
protected by a transmission protection mechanism such as MSP or SNCP the LCAS
hold-off timer value should be raised (~100 ms) to allow the generally faster MSP or
SNCP protection mechanisms to react before the LCAS undertakes any repair attempts.
In this way less packets are lost.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-15
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Functionality
The Ethernet interfaces can be configured to support Link Pass Through (LPT) mode.
LPT is a mechanism that notifies equipment attached to both ends of an
Ethernet-over-SDH connection that a failure has occurred at some point in the path.
The notification consists of interrupting the Ethernet transmitter of the SDH equipment
at the Ethernet egress point. The downstream equipment, a Lambda Router or an IP
router, observes the absence of the Ethernet input signal and uses it as a fast trigger to
perform its native protection scheme.
Enabling LPT
LPT can only be enabled on point-to-point Ethernet-over-SDH connections that use the
GFP encapsulation mechanism. The remote fail information is transported in-band via
GFP Client Signal Fail frames.
Support for LPT
With the availability of R4.1.2, two different mechanisms of Link Pass Through are
supported:
1. LPT with Restart
This mechanism is the same LPT mechanism as introduced in R3.0 of the 1655
AMU
2. LPT without Restart
This mechanism is added in R4.1.2
Both mechanisms are carried forward to R5.0 and later
LPT with Restart
This mechanism, in case of an upstream failure, disables the Ethernet transmitter

downstream from the point of failure for a period of 3 seconds.
If a failure at the Ethernet ingress port is detected, the corresponding output is

disabled for 3 seconds.
This robust mechanism never leads to deadlocks.
In case of uni-directional failures, this mechanism relies on a routing protocol at

the MPLS or IP layer to keep the link down until it is restored bi-directionally.
LPT without restart
This mechanism disables both Ethernet transmitters, upstream and downstream

from the point of failure for the entire duration of the failure.
In case of a uni-directional failure, this mechanism keeps the link down for the
connected routers, without relying on the presence of a routing protocol.
Recommendations to provision LPT
Provision the same LPT mode on both ends of the Ethernet-over-SDH link.
LPT with Restart is recommended for networks that have already deployed LPT on
1655 AMU before R4.1.2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-16
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPT without Restart mode is recommended for the following deployment scenarios:
in green-field installations and in cases where manually provisioned IP/MPLS
routers are connected
when interworking with the 1643 AMS, 1645 AMC or 1663 ADMU
Option card support for LPT mode
The following option cards support the LPT mode:
EPL4_E14
EPL4_E132
EPL4_E132_75
ESW4_E14

Introduction
1655 AMU support the following schemes for the mapping of Ethernet packets into
SDH frames:
Link Access Procedure SDH (LAPS encapsulation)
Generic Framing Procedure (GFP encapsulation)

EoS (Ethernet over SDH) mapping
LAPS encapsulation
LAPS encapsulation is implemented according to ITU-T X.86. It is supported when

using the EPL4_E14, EPL4_E132_75, and ESW4_E14 option cards.
The following rates are supported:
Mapping Ethernet packets into Vc12-Xv
GFP encapsulation
GFP encapsulation is implemented according to T1X1.5/2000-147. It is supported when

using the EPL4_E14, EPL4_E132_75,ESW4_E14, EOP4_E132, EOP4_E132_75, X8PL
or X4IP option cards.
over a transport network.
The following GFP encapsulation are possible:
Mapping of Ethernet MAC frames into Lower Order SDH VC12Xv
Mapping of Ethernet MAC frames into Lower Order SDH VC3Xv

Mapping of Ethernet MAC frames into Higher Order SDH VC4Xv
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-17
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VC12Xv GFP encapsulation
The 1655 AMU supports virtual concatenation of Lower Order SDH VC-12 as inverse
multiplexing technique to size the bandwidth of a single internal WAN port for
transport of encapsulated Ethernet and Fast Ethernet packets over the SDH/SONET
network. This is noted VC12-Xv, where X = 1...63 when using the X8PL and X =
1{63 per port when using EPL4_E14, EPL4_E132, EPL4_E132_75, and ESW4_E14
option cards. Usage is in conformance with ITU-T G.707 Clause 11 (2000 Edition) and
G.783 Clause 12.5 (2000).
Additionally, the use of G.707 Extended Signal Label is supported using V5 (bits 5-7)
field.
The 1655 AMU supports virtual concatenation of Lower Order SDH VC-3 as inverse
transport of encapsulated Ethernet and Fast Ethernet packets over the SDH/SONET
network. This is noted VC3Xv, where X = 1...3 for X8PL and X = 1{9 per port when
using EPL4_E14, EPL4_E132, EPL4_E132_75, and ESW4_E14 option cards. Usage is
in conformance with ITU-T G.707 Clause 11 (2000 Edition) and G.783 Clause 12.5
(2000) and T1X1 T1.105 Clause 7.3.2 (2001 Edition).
The 1655 AMU supports virtual concatenation of Higher Order SDH VC-4 as inverse
transport of encapsulated Gigabit Ethernet packets over the SDH network. This is
noted VC4-Xv, where X = 1...7 per port when using EPL4_E14, EPL4_E132_75, and
ESW4_E14 option cards. Usage is in conformance with ITU-T G.707 Clause 11 (2000
Edition) and G.783 Clause 12.5 (2000) and T1X1 T1.105 Clause 7.3.2 (2001 Edition).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-18
Features
Equipment features
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment features
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about 1655 AMU features concerning equipment
inventory and failure reports and Digital Diagnostics Monitoring (DDM) of SFPs.
Contents
3-19
3-20

Equipment inventory
For each installed circuit pack, the 1655 AMU automatically maintains an inventory of
the following information:
Serial number
Functional name
Item code
Software release (of the NE)

Comcode
Interchangeability Marker
You can obtain this information by an inventory request command.

1655 AMU additionally supports an inventory of used SFPs. Besides the administrative
state, the following information can be retrieved for the currently present and last
accepted SFP:
Physical identifier
Connector type
Transceiver code
Revision number
Vendor serial number
Comcode
Compatibility byte
Alcatel-Lucent unique number
SFP vendor ID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-19
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Module qualifier
Module type
CLEI code (if applicable)
Apparatus code/Item code

Interchangeability marker
The 1655 AMU checks the presence of Alcatel-Lucent specific SFP modules via the
Alcatel-Lucent compatibilty byte. In case of a mismatch, the system raises an alarm.
Equipment failure reports
Failure reports are generated for equipment faults and can be forwarded via the
ITM-CIT or Lucents Network Management Systems or Lucent NMS interfaces.

Overview
This section provides information on 1655 AMU features related to Digital Diagnostics
Monitoring (DDM) of SFPs.
SFP module information
The user can view the performance parameters information of an SFP optical interface
module. This data known as digital diagnostics depends on the manufacturer and
type of SFP module in use.
The digital diagnostics feature provides the following information:
optical input power in dBm ( 3 dB accuracy). This number is displayed as an

average value (AVG) or as an optical modulation amplitude (OMA) value. The
lowest value reported is 40 dBm
optical transmit power in dBm ( 3 dB accuracy). The lowest value reported is 40
dBm.
Laser bias current in mA ( 10% accuracy)
internal temperature of the module in C ( 3C accuracy)
supply voltage of the module in V ( 3% accuracy)
For each parameter, four thresholds are displayed in the same units. A flag appearing
against a parameter indicates deviation from the upper and lower warning and alarm
threshold values specified by the manufacturer of the SFP.
The system does not monitor the SFP parameters and no alarms are raised if the SFP
thresholds deviate from the specified values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-20
Features
Equipment features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The system generates an unavailable response if:
digital diagnostics is not supported by the SFP module

the administrative state of the module is not in the ACCEPTED state
the data in the SFP contains checksum errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-21
Issue 1 March 2009
Features

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about synchronization features, timing protection and
timing interfaces of 1655 AMU .
Contents
Timing features
3-22
3-22
Timing features
Synchronization modes
Several synchronization configurations can be used. 1655 AMU can be provisioned for
the following timing modes:
free-running operation
holdover mode
locked mode
In locked mode, the internal SDH Equipment Clock (SEC) is locked to:
one of the STM-N signals.
one of the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals

one of the external 2 MHz / 2 Mbit/s inputs (one per main board)

Synchronization Status Message (SSM) signal
A timing marker or synchronization status message signal can be used to transfer the
signal-quality level throughout a network. This will guarantee that all network elements
are always synchronized to the highest-quality clock that is available.
On 1655 AMU systems, the SSM algorithm or the timing marker is supported
according to ITU-T recommendation G.781 and ETSI recommendation ETS
300-417-6-1. The SSM is supported on all STM-N interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-22
Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
External timing interfaces
1655 AMU provides one external timing input and output per main card for ITU-T
compliant 2048 kHz / 2048 kbit/s timing signals. The timing output is realized as RJ45
connector suitable for symmetrical twisted pair cables with an impedance of 120 or
coaxial cables with an impedance of 75 .
2 Mbit/s tributary retiming
The user can choose whether individual 2 Mbit/s tributary outputs operate in
self-timed or re-synchronized mode. In the (standard) self-timed mode, the phase
of the outgoing signal is a moving average of the phase of the 2 Mbit/s signal because
the signal is embedded in the VC-12 that is disassembled. In the re-synchronized mode
the 2 Mbit/s signal is timed by the SDH Equipment Clock (SEC) of the network
element; frequency differences between the local clock and the 2 Mbit/s signal
embedded in the VC-12 to be disassembled are accommodated by a slip buffer.
There is also the following option: whenever the traceability of the local clock drops
below a certain threshold, the re-timing 2 Mbit/s interfaces automatically switch to
self-timing. When this fail condition disappears, these interfaces return to re-timing.
These changes do not involve any hits in the traffic.
Important! Re-timing should only be applied when the network element which
performs the re-timing and the network element which generated the 2 Mbit/s
signal have traced back their SECs to the same synchronization source. Otherwise a
continuous stream of 2 Mbit/s frame slips or skips will occur at the re-timing point
which is indicated by a FCS threshold crossing alarm.
The user has the option of operating individual 2 Mbit/s outputs in the
re-synchronized mode. In this mode the 2 Mbit/s output signal is timed by the
system clock of the network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-23
Issue 1 March 2009
Features
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and

Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

Provisioning
Overview
Purpose
The following section provides information about interfaces for Operations,

Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) activities and the monitoring
and diagnostics features of 1655 AMU .
Contents
3-24

First maintenance tier
The maintenance procedures of the 1655 AMU systems are built on two levels of
system information and control. The first maintenance tier consists of the LEDs on the
equipment. There are six LEDs on the front of the main board of 1655 AMU : Two are
for unit level indications and four for failure indications related to each individual SFP.
Additionally there are LEDs on option cards and near to the SFPs. The LEDs indicate
basic alarms or basic operation states.
Second maintenance tier
The second maintenance tier employs the Alcatel-Lucent network management system.
Detailed information and system control are obtained by using the ITM-CIT (Craft
Interface Terminal), which supports provisioning, maintenance and configuration on a
local basis. A similar facility (via a Q-LAN connection or via the DCC channels) is
remotely available on the element manager or through Lucents Network Management
Systems or Lucent NMS, which provides a centralized maintenance view and supports
maintenance activities from a central location.
Alcatel-Lucent network management systems
Alcatel-Lucents Network Management Systems or the OMS fully support the

management of 1655 AMU .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-24
Features

Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fan management
A fan is available for mounting below the 2m/4o version, below the vertically mounted
1m/1o version (1 per shelf) or next to the horizontally mounted 1m/1o version (1 per
shelf). The same fan can be used in all cases. The fan is in-service replaceable,
provided that proper care is taken with the cabling. The fan is powered and managed
via the USB interface on the front of (one of the) Main Units. For more details, refer
Note: When two fans are placed under the 2m/4o version, 2 trib slots and 2 main slots
or 4 trib slots can be cooled effectively.
The presence of USB powered/controlled fans can be established on a remote
management system. Provisioning of fans is not necessary; they are auto-provisioned
after autonomous detection by the AMU hardware. Alarms will be raised if a fan fails
or is removed.
Special mounting brackets
To use the horizontally positioned 1m/1o version in combination with a fan unit, it
must be mounted with a specific mounting bracket that allows sliding in and out of the
fan unit.
Software maintenance
Using web interface to commission the system
Several activities related to system commissioning can be undertaken from a PC

directly connected to the G-LAN interface of the system on Main Unit #1.
The user can connect via a password protected HTTP session to the system, which
allows the following actions:
Upload of the system MIB to the PC
Download of a prepared MIB from the PC to the system
Download of a system SW image from the PC to the system

View a list of currently active alarms
Remote reset on unit level
The 1655 AMU R5.0 introduces the option to reset a certain unit in the system from a
remote management system, such as CIT or OMS. The reset option provides an
additional approach to fix a problem remotely. This option avoids dispatching a
member of the maintenance staff to physically go to a system and, for instance, pull
and re-seat a pack in order to reset it. Support for two types of reset is available:
Warm Reset: A Warm Reset of a unit resets the controller of the unit without affecting
the transmission path. A warm reset temporarily disables all software based algorithms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-25
Issue 1 March 2009
Features

Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cold Reset: A Cold Reset of a unit resets the controller of the unit and rewrites all
registers in the transmission devices under its span of control. This operation affects
transmission. Although, the power to the unit is not interrupted, the Cold Reset is
similar to a reboot due to an interruption of the power, without having to physically
unplug and re-insert a unit from the system.
Verifying the successful execution of reset option
Observe the following guidelines to verify if the reset command is actually executed:
Inspect the alarm log of the system and verify if there are any UNITcINIT alarms
as a consequence of the unit reset action.
The reset command can be considered as failed, if the UNITcINIT alarm

notification does not appear within a reasonable time.
Verify the timestamp of the UNITcINIT alarm. The unit might be in the boot state
when the reset command is issued. In that case, a UNITcINIT alarm is already
active for that slot.
Verify the active alarm list just before and after issuing the reset command.
Recommended usage of reset option
1. If a tributary unit is suspected to hang, then execute a Warm Reset of that unit.
2. If Step 1 does not solve the problem, then execute a Warm Reset of the main
controller.
3. If Step 2 does not help, then execute a Cold Reset of the unit.
Observe UNITcINIT
In this case, the Cold Reset of the same unit will also not help:
1. If you do not observe the UNITcINIT in the alarm log after issuing a Warm Reset
command, then it is likely that the issue you are trying to troubleshoot does not
accept or interpret the reset command by the target.
2. If that is the case, then Cold Reset of the same unit will also not help.
3. Consider physically unplugging and re-inserting the unit.
Before excecuting cold reset command
If the unit is a part of the equipment protection group, execute the forced switch
command to switch all traffic away from the unit targeted for (cold) reset. This
prevents unnecessary traffic loss.
Execute a cold reset command only after switching the traffic away from the unit.
Reset button on 1655 AMU faceplates
Apart from the remote reset commands, the main units of the 1655 AMU have a
RESET button on their faceplates. Pushing this button has the same effect as issuing a
remote Warm Reset command targeted at that unit.
Operation system support
Support for running the ITM-CIT application on the Microsoft Windows Vista
operating system is available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-26
Features

Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCC support through P12s channels
Features of DCC support through P12 channels include:
The system supports DCN connectivity over P12s signals mapped in a VC12.
30 timeslots (1-15 and 17-32) out of the P12s are used to map the OSI frames
through bit-wise HDLC. TS0 contains a valid (multi-)frameword and CRC-4.
A maximum of eight bi-directional P12s channels can be used for DCN transport.
The DCN-P12s can be contained in a physical E1 signal or mapped in an STM-N
signal when it leaves or enters the system.
The DCN-P12s termination points support LOF, DEG and AIS detection but no
further FM or PM functionality. They are mapped in VC12 containers and injected
into a specific VC4, in the HO-CC of the system.
The VC4 and containing VC12 containers are managed as standard TTPs. From
this point onwards, the VC4 containing the DCN-P12s can be handled as any other
VC4 in the system, including routing to the LO-CC to support VC12 SNC/N.
The system can establish OSI communication with the 1645 AMC using a DCN
connection mapped in a P12s channel.
P12s source and sink termination
The system supports full P12s source and sink termination for member signals of a
P12s-Xv concatenated group.
Full TS0, E-bit (REI), A-bit (RDI), and CRC-4 are inserted in accordance with G.704
framing pattern and Sa bits are sourced as zeroes. The payload in TS1 is mapped
through TS31. A P12s_AIS signal is sourced when no payload is present.
The user can provision the monitoring mode of the P12s termination function to
monitored (MON) and non-monitored (NMON) modes. TS0 is terminated and
inspected for AIS or LOF defects. Alarms corresponding to the relevant defects are
raised and AIS is inserted as consequent action. The user can also provision the DEG
alarm thresholds.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-27
Issue 1 March 2009
Features

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
An Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) is a list of alarms with an associated
severity value for every alarm. ASAPs allow the user to control alarm reporting with
more flexibility, and to create multiple alarm profiles for each alarm category and to
assign these profiles to entities within the system. The 1655 AMU supports flexible
alarm reporting through the Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles (ASAP).
All alarms are classified into a particular alarm category and are pre-defined. The
categories containing the alarms are referred to as pre-defined alarm profile types. Each
profile type has a default profile and a set of profiles created by users. These profiles
and the default profiles within the profile types are referred to as ASAPs. The assigned
alarm severity levels refer to each alarm within each ASAP. For each alarm in the
alarm profile, users can assign a severity value and reported state. The alarm severity
values and reported state constitute the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. The default
profiles are available after system installation. When a failure occurs, the ASAPs
created by customers are used to specify the alarm severity level.
All the alarms are categorized into 14 different ASAP types. For example, equipment,
DCN, timing, and so on. The default ASAPs contain default settings for the severity
and reporting values and can be edited. In addition to the default ASAP, multiple
ASAPs can be created, edited, and deleted. For each alarm profile type, a default
ASAP is available and can be edited but cannot be deleted. Users can assign labels for
each ASAP. However, ASAP values created by customers can only be deleted when
they are not assgined to a port or termination point. The default ASAP values are
effective, whereas, every new ASAP profile created by customers must be assigned to
a functional system entity such as a specific port or termination point to be effective.
During provisioning, ASAPs can be assigned to functional system components such as
a circuit pack or a specific port. Each ASAP can be uniquely identified by its type and
name. Note that predefined or default alarms or profile types cannot be changed or
deleted by the user. Only the profiles created by the user can be changed or deleted.
The severity and reported values are enabled when the ASAP is assigned to a port or
termination point that can raise the alarms contained in the alarm profile type.
Individual ASAPs can also be assigned to a multiple set of functional system entities
according to their ASAP type.
The 1655 AMU supports 64 ASAPs including the default profile. In addition to the
default ASAPs, customers can create up to 49 new ASAPs.
For more information on how to create, modify, delete, assign or retrieve ASAPs, refer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
3-28
Features

Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm severities
These alarm severity levels are used in the following description of the ASAP types:
1. Prompt (Urgent alarm that requires immediate (prompt) maintenance action)
2. Deferred (Non-urgent alarm that requires deferred maintenance action)
3. Info (Informational alarm).
Reporting state
Each alarm can be assigned one of the following reporting states:

Reporting state
Meaning
Reported
The alarm - when raised - will be reported

towards the management systems, and
displayed on the graphical user interfaces.
Not reported
The alarm - when raised - will not be

reported.
Please note that changing the alarm reporting state does not affect the display of
currently present and history alarms. Especially, the display of already present alarms
cannot be removed if their reporting state is changed from Reported to Not
Reported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
3-29
Issue 1 March 2009
4 lanning Network
P
Applications
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides a high level overview of planning considerations and

recommends network topologies for the 1655 AMU Add-Drop-Multiplexer.
Contents
4-2
4-2
Network topologies
4-4
Linear applications
4-4
4-5
Ring application
4-6
4-7
4-7
Dual ring closure
4-8
4-9
Hub application
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-1
Issue 1 March 2009

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When planning your system with the 1655 AMU, the following items should be
considered:
Synchronous Capacity one through four STM-N optical aggregate interface pairs
that can be equipped with five different STM-1 (S1.1; L1.1; L1.2; STM-1e; SH
1310 and LH 1490 single fiber bidirectional), four different STM-4 (S4.1; L4.1;
L4.2; SH 1310 and LH 1490 single fiber bidirectional) SFPs and single fiber
working SFPs, and four different STM-16 SFPs (l16, S16.1, L16.1, and L16.2) that
can be used for short haul, long haul, and intra-office applications. The cWDM
SFPs can be used for STM-4/STM-16 transmission over 40/80km, 8 wavelength
(channel 11-18). For detailed technical data and optical parameters of the interfaces,
please refer to Technical specifications (p. 2-52).
Note that for single fiber bi-directional SFPs, a set or pair of SFPs with different
wavelengths such as 1310 and 1490 is required. For the 1655 AMU , use the 1310
nm (CC:109559500) and 1490 nm (CC: 109559492) single fiber bi-directional
SFPs.
Additional Capacity:
Optional sixty-three additional 2 Mbit/s signals

Optional two E/FE and two E/FE/GE [GE Base-T or Base-X (ZX, LX, SX
through SFP)] and four E1 (provisionable 120 or 75 )
Optional four E/FE and thirty-two E1 (75 )

Optional two E/FE, two E/FE/GE, and four E1 interfaces
Switchable four STM-1, two STM-4, and eight STM-1 or only one STM-4
Optional three switched 34/45 Mbit/s interfaces on DIN1.6/5.6 coaxial

connectors and 4xE1 interfaces on RJ45
Optional sixteen additional 1.5 Mbit/s signals (only in 2m/4o version with
adapter card)
Optional two 34 Mbit/s signals (only in 2m/4o version with adapter card)
Optional two 45 Mbit/s signals (only in 2m/4o version with adapter card)
Optional four 10/100BASE-Ts (only in 2m/4o version with adapter card)
Optional eight E/FE interfaces in Private Line mode (only in 2m/4o version
with adapter card)
Additionally, four cages for two STM-1 and two STM-1/STM-1e or STM-4
SFP plugin at the second main board
Synchronization: STM-N aggregate line interface timing or via a 2 Mbit/s data

input or via the 2 MHz, 2 Mbit/s timing input
Protection: VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 SNC/N
1+1 MSP protection for optical STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 and electrical STM-1

interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment protection: A system equipped with two main cards can either operate in
equipment protection mode, or alternatively, the main card in slot MAIN2 operates
as a tributary card. The latter is easier to manage, but does not provide automatic
switch over in case of equipment failures in the transmission and timing
functionality of the main cards.
Operations Systems: Remote management with Lucents Network Management

Systems or Lucent NMS and local management with Wavestar ITM-CIT
Two possibilities for Power supply :
DC (unit contains DC connector)

AC via an external AC/DC connector.
The 1655 AMU provides four miscellaneous discrete inputs (MDIs) which can be
used to read external devices assigned by the customer. Examples are monitoring
temperature, humidity, open doors, etc.
The equipment provides four miscellaneous discrete outputs (MDOs) which can be
used to drive external devices assigned by the customer. Examples are signaling
devices, temperature conditioning, etc.
When not assigned by the customer, the 1655 AMU behaves such that MDO 1 has
been assigned to indicate power failure (this contact is normally closed when no
power is present). MDO 2, MDO 3, MDO 4 are respectively assigned to Prompt,
Deferred, Information alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network topologies
Linear applications
Point-to-point applications without MSP protection
The figures below show a point-to-point application without MSP protection.
Point-to-point application with MSP protection
The figure below shows a point-to-point application with MSP protection.
Linear application with MSP protection
A linear application with MSP protection can be found in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-4
Network topologies
Linear applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Linear unprotected application
When cost is a major factor, this application requires a minimum amount of equipment
and fiber. It is well suited for LAN-to-LAN traffic on campus networks or between
business locations requiring cost-effective and reliable communications. Management
requirements of this application are minimal.

The following figure displays a folded ring application which can be implemented for
an STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16 folded ring configuration.
Compared to the linear application in Linear unprotected application (p. 4-5), the
folded-ring provides extra reliability by protection as well as the potential to upgrade
the ring with diverse possibilities of fiber routing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ring application
The STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16 Ring application illustrated in the figure below is an
example of a simple and inexpensive way of transporting all signals that can be
connected to a 1655 AMU, like E1 and 10/100 BASE-T. The individual nodes can be
managed remotely or locally by either the Lucents Network Management Systems or
Lucent NMS or the Wavestar ITM-CIT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-6
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The figure below shows an example of a dual-homed ring application. Similar to the
single-homed example in the previous chapter, access to the STM-N network is
through two hosts. This may be preferable to the single-host application where
completing the STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16 ring may be difficult due to geographical
features. It also provides protection against node failure through the second host node.

The figure below shows a linear extension. In this case the STM-1 or STM-4 or
STM-16 linear extension can be laid out protected or unprotected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dual ring closure

The figure below illustrates a dual ring closure application. This configuration connects
the STM-1 or STM-4 or STM-16 ring to the STM-N network through a host node.
An STM-1 line (STM-1 tributary interface) with MSP protection allows the connection
between e.g. two 1655 AMU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-8
Network topologies
Dual ring closure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Sl-14/4 option card provides eight STM-1 or two STM-4 interfaces or a mix of
both options. This set up enables ring closure for four STM-1 rings or one STM-4 ring
per tributary card, in addition to the main cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-9
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hub application
The figure below shows an example hub application to concentrate SDH, PDH and
Ethernet traffic. Typically the feeding network elements would be laid out as 1m/1o
hardware version.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-10
Network topologies
Hub application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This application can only be created with a 1655 AMU AMU 2m/4o version with two
main cards, one for each ring. In this case the STM-4 or STM-16 rings are
unprotected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-11
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The figure below shows a typical example to interconnect SDH, PDH and Ethernet
traffic in a ring with a 1655 AMU 1m/1o version.
The following figure depicts an example VC-12 grooming application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-12
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The figure below shows an example of the IP tunneling in the DCC channels
application. This feature provides a way to manage IP devices through the Data
Communication Network (DCN). An IP EMS (Element Management System) is used
to manage NEs which use IP based management protocols (IP NEs).
The embedded overhead channel (Data Communication Channel) of the 1655 AMU is
used to transport the management data between the IP EMS and the different NEs.
An IP tunnel can be seen as a set of two static routing entries in nodes on the edge of
the OSI network and the corresponding static entries in the routing table. The LAN
used by IP EMS can also be used by Lucents Network Management Systems or
Lucent NMS.
2Mbit/s
IP
EMS
dcc
dcc
IP
router
ds NE
Lan
IP
NE
NE
Lan
IP tunnel
ds NE
IP NE
Lan
IP
ds NE = Network Element with dual stack

NE = Other Network Element
The figure below shows an application with AnyMedia Access equipments (AAS). The
EMS for AAS realizes the management of the different AAS equipments via the
Q-LAN interfaces and using the DCC channels of the different 1655 AMU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-13
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1655 AMU is an attractive offer in a ring topology for serving GSM/UMTS base
stations.
The figure below illustrates an example of 1655 AMU in a GSM/UMTS application.

The TransLAN option board, enables the SDH network elements to provide Ethernet
over SDH, and offers variable data applications on top of the traditional TDM
applications. This results in cost-effective, simple and reliable multi-service solutions
for customers. TransLAN can provide VLAN functions, and bandwidth can be shared
for different customers.
Direct LAN-to-LAN interconnect (two LANs)
The most straightforward application of the TransLAN option board is to interconnect

two LAN segments that are at a distance that cannot be reached with a simple Ethernet
repeater, since that would violate the collision domain size rules. Both LANs do not
have to be of the same speed. It is possible to interconnect a 10BASE-T and a
100BASE-T/X LAN this way. This application is shown in the figure below:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-14
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Direct LAN-to-LAN interconnect (Multiple LANs)
A next step in complexity is to interconnect multiple LANs, more than two, at

different locations. It is possible to associate a single LAN port with two or more
WAN ports. In this way, multiple sites can be interconnected, forming a fully Layer 2
switched WAN Ethernet network. This application is shown in the figure below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-15
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN-ISP interconnect
An extension of the previous application is to have one LAN drop of a multi-point

LAN-to-LAN interconnection at the point of presence of an ISP (Internet Service
Provider), to provide for instance Internet access to the users in the company LANs.
Multiple customers sharing a WAN connection
To increase the efficiency of the bandwidth usage, it is possible to route the Ethernet
traffic of multiple end-users over the same SDH facilities. This feature is called
LAN-VPN and makes use of customer VPN tags, a tagging scheme derived from the
IEEE802.1Q VLAN standard to separate the traffic of the different users. The
following image displays this application.
VLAN trunking
At the ISP premises, the aggregated LAN traffic from multiple customers (i.e. multiple
VLANs) via one single high capacity Ethernet link (Fast Ethernet) to data equipment
in a Central Office or ISP POP such as an IP edge Router, IP Service Switch or ATM
Switch, can be handled by means of the VLAN trunking feature. VLAN trunking is a
possible application of the IEEE 802.1Q or the IEEE 802.1ad VLAN tagging scheme.
Main benefit of the VLAN trunking feature is that TransLAN cards can hand off end
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-16
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
user LAN traffic via one high capacity LAN port instead of multiple low speed LAN
ports, thus reducing port, space and cabling costs. VLAN trunking (p. 4-17) gives an
example of VLAN Trunking.
DCN support with the TransLAN unit
The TransLAN option board can also be used for DCN engineering purposes. An
important application in this respect is to use the Ethernet interfaces to make a long
distance Q-LAN connection. This solution can replace the current solution that uses
external modems or routers. It is often cheaper and easier to manage if the long
distance Q-LAN connection can be made over the SDH infrastructure (at the cost of
the bandwidth of a few VC-12s). The DCN application of the TransLAN option board
assumes the NMS is collocated with at least one of the NEs equipped with a
TransLAN card (e.g., 1655 AMU, 1663 ADMu. In such a case, one can connect the
Ethernet port of the Lucent NMS to one of the designated 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
LAN ports and configure the associated WAN port with desired bandwidth (e.g.,
VC-12) to carry the management traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-17
Issue 1 March 2009
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The point-to-point LAN connection is used to interconnect two sites of a customer
each of which has a LAN interface. Another application is the interconnection of the
sites of two service providers that have Ethernet interfaces.
Some dedicated SDH bandwidth is allocated to the connection between both end
points. The virtual concatenation mapping allows the operator to assign an optimized
SDH bandwidth. Such an application can effectively be realized with 1655 AMU using
one of the private line option cards which provides the GFP and LAPS Ethernet
mapping schemes and the LCAS protocol (please refer to Ethernet features (p. 3-12),
Ethernet mapping schemes (p. 3-17) and Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
(LCAS) (p. 3-15)).
The following figure shows an example of a point-to-point LAN connection:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
4-18
Network topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ESW4_E14 option card supports point-to-point LAN connections with Ethernet
switching. This allows statistical multiplexing and as a result, higher bandwidth
efficiency. The 1655 AMU 1m/1o version with ESW4_E14 and EPL4_E14 option
cards presents a very efficient way for full throughput Gigabit Ethernet access at low
costs. The Gigabit Ethernet connection can be transported using 2 STM-4 links and
virtual concatenation and LCAS distributed over both links.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
4-19
Issue 1 March 2009

5
Overview
Purpose
This chapter presents Alcatel-Lucents quality policy and describes the reliability of the
1655 AMU.
Contents
Quality
5-2
5-2
Ensuring quality
5-3
5-4
5-7
5-7
Reliability program
5-8
5-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
5-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Quality
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Quality
Overview
Purpose
This section describes Alcatel-Lucents commitment to quality and reliability and how
quality is ensured.
Contents
5-2
Ensuring quality
5-3
5-4

Alcatel-Lucent is committed to providing our customers with products of the highest
level of quality and reliability in the industry. 1655 AMU is a prime example of this
commitment.
In line with this policy, all major transmission facilities in the USA, Europe and China
are ISO-9000 certified. In line with the above, Alcatel-Lucent policy statement in this
respect is as follows.
Quality policy
We ensure that our customers view us as an essential partner to their success - today
and tomorrow - by:
Building on our global capabilities to deliver the best communications solutions

and services.
Providing the best customer and end-user experience through innovation, teamwork,
supplier partnerships, and continual improvement.
Delivering on the commitments we make.
Reliability in the product life-cycle
Each stage of the life cycle of 1655 AMU relies on people and processes that
contribute to the highest product quality and reliability possible. The reliability of a
product begins at the earliest planning stage and continues into:
Product architecture
Design and simulation

Documentation
Prototype testing during development
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
5-2
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Design change control

Manufacturing and product testing (including 100% screening)
Product quality assurance
Product field performance

Product field return management
The R&D community of Alcatel-Lucent is certified by ISO 9001.
Ensuring quality
This section describes the critical elements that ensure product quality and reliability
within
Product development
Manufacturing
Critical elements of product development
The product development groups strict adherence to the following critical elements
ensures the products reliability
Design standards
Design and test practices

Comprehensive qualification programs
System-level reliability integration
Reliability audits and predictions

Development of quality assurance standards for manufactured products
Critical elements of manufacturing
Note: Independent Quality Representatives are also present at manufacturing

locations to ensure shipped product quality.
The manufacturing and field deployment groups strict adherence to the following
critical elements ensures the products reliability
Pre-manufacturing
Qualification
Accelerated product testing
Product screening
Production quality tracking

Failure mode analysis
Feedback and corrective actions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
5-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CE conformity
Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent declares that the Alcatel-Lucent product

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal, Release 1.0 through 6.0
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the
following Directive:
IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1)
is tested and conforms with the essential requirements for protection of health and the
safety of the user and any other person and Electromagnetic Compatibility. Conformity
is indicated by the CE mark affixed to the product. For more information regarding CE
marking and Declaration of Conformity (DoC), please contact your local
Alcatel-Lucent Customer Service Organization.
This product is in conformity with Article 3, Paragraph 3 of the R&TTE Directive and
interworks in networks with other equipment connected to the optical
telecommunication network.
Conformance with specifications of optical interfaces is granted as stated in the Official
Journal of the European Union.
Compliance Statement in other European Languages
English
Hereby, Alcatel-Lucent, declares that this 1655 AMU is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1).
Finnish
Alcatel-Lucent vakuuttaa tten ett 1655 AMU tyyppinen laite on direktiivin IEC
60950-1 (ed. 1) oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen
mukainen.
Dutch
Bij deze verklaart Alcatel-Lucent dat deze 1655 AMU voldoet aan de essentile eisen
en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1).
French
Par la prsente, Alcatel-Lucent dclare que ce 1655 AMU est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1) qui lui sont
applicables.
Swedish
Hrmed intygar Alcatel-Lucent att denna 1655 AMU str I verensstmmelse med de
vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv
IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
5-4
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Danish
Undertegnede Alcatel-Lucent erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr 1655 AMU

overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1)
German
Hiermit erklrt Alcatel-Lucent die bereinstimmung des Gertes 1655 AMU mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie
IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1).
Greek
M THN AOYA Alcatel-Lucent I OTI 1655 AMU

YMMOTAI O TI OYII AAITI AI TI OI
TI IATAI T OIA IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1)
Italian
Con la presente Alcatel-Lucent dichiara che questo 1655 AMU conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva IEC 60950-1 (ed.
1).
Spanish
Por medio de la presente Alcatel-Lucent declara que el 1655 AMU cumple con los
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la
Directiva IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1)
Portuguese
Alcatel-Lucent declara que este 1655 AMU est conforme com os requisitos essenciais
e outras provises da Directiva IEC 60950-1 (ed. 1).
Eco-environmental statements
The statements that follow are the eco-environmental statements that apply to the
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive.
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or
other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling
targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field Services /
Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
For installations not performed by Alcatel-Lucent, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent
Customer Support Center at:
Technical Support Services, Alcatel-Lucent.
Within the United States: 1 866 Alcatel-Lucent8 (866 582 3688), prompt 1
From all other countries: +1 630 224 4672, prompt 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
5-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Quality
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recycling / take-back / disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below when put on the
market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life, in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation. They
shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may
be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and
human health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin
indicates that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life, or products displaced by
Alcatel-Lucent equipment offers.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Takeback Support at
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com.
Material content compliance
European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, Restriction of the use of certain

Hazardous Substances (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium,
hexavalent chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic
equipment. This Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the
EU market from 1 July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for
lead solder in network infrastructure equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the
EU from 1 July 2006 will comply with the RoHS Directive.
Technical documentation
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is

kept at Alcatel-Lucent location which is responsible for this product. For more
information please contact your local Alcatel-Lucent representative.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
5-6
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how reliability is specified.

Contents
5-7
Reliability program
5-8
5-8
This section provides general reliability specifications for 1655 AMU.
Mean time between failures
The mean time between failures (MTBF) for the whole 1655 AMU are described in
1655 AMU circuit-pack fit rates and MTBF values (p. 5-8).
Infant mortality factor
Note: The steady state failure rate is equal to the failure rate of the system.
The number of failures that a product experiences during the first year of service after
turn-up may be greater than the number of subsequent annual steady state failures. This
is the early life or infant mortality period. The ratio of the first year failure rate to the
steady state failure rate is termed the infant mortality factor (IMF).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
5-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability program
Introduction
Reliability is a key ingredient of products life cycle from the earliest planning stage.
Major occurrences at the start of the project involve modeling of system reliability.
During the design and development stage, reliability predictions, qualification and
selection of components, definition of quality assurance standards and prototyping of
critical system areas ensured built-in reliability. Manufacturing and field deployment,
techniques such as pre-manufacturing, qualification, tracking of production quality,
burn-in tests, failure mode analysis and feedback and correction further enhance the
ongoing reliability of the 1655 AMU.
Introduction
The 1655 AMU provides various protective switching mechanisms where necessary to
support a high level of service availability.
Reliability and service availability
Protection mechanisms are supported by the 1655 AMU:
Main card protection
path protection or SNC/N protection (SubNetwork Connection protection) for

higher and lower order VCs
1+1 multiplex section protection (MSP)
Ethernet traffic can be protected by:
spanning tree protocol
link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

link pass through (LPT)
1655 AMU circuit-pack fit rates and MTBF values
The following tables gives an overview of the circuit packs fit rates and MTBF values
(calculated according to SR-332 RPP with confidence level of 95%. Therefore, it may
not be comparable to other Alcatel-Lucent Products):
1655 AMU Products
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)
1655 AMU main card ASC101B (CC: 109555516)

- MI-14/4
9500
12
1655 AMU main card ASC110 (CC: 109588954) MI-16/4
9500
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
5-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products

1655 AMU
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)
9000
13
1655 AMU subrack 2m/4o vertical mount ASH101

(CC: 109509752)
146
780
1655 AMU subrack 6H (2m/4o) ASH111 (CC:

109667824)
161
708
1655 AMU subrack 2H (1m/1o) ASH112 (CC:

109667832)
150
760
1655 AMU AMU fan for 6H subrack ASF101

(CC: 109667840)
4560
25
1655 AMU AMU Fan for 2H subrack ASF102

(CC: 109667857)
2660
43
1655 AMU subrack 1m/1o, horizontal and vertical

mount ASH102 (CC: 109509778)
135
846
1655 AMU PI-E1/63 option card, 63 E1 120

(CC: 109509679)
6000
19
1655 AMU PI-E1/63_75 option card, 63 E1 75

(CC: 109535468)
6000
19
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 (EPL4_E14)

option card, 2 E/FE, 2 FE/GE and 4 E1 120 or 75
interfaces (CC: 109543504)
5000
23
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 (EPL4_E132)

option card 4 E/FE and 32 E1 120
(CC: 109543512)
5740
20
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 (EPL4_E132_75)

option card 4 E/FE and 32 E1 75
(CC: 109543520)
5000
23
1655 AMU ESW4_E14 option card, Ethernet and

E1 - 2 E/FE, 2 E/FE/GE interfaces and 4
(75/120 Ohm) interfaces, 8 WAN ports (CC
109579896)
6500
18
1655 AMU
6500
18
6500
18
main card ASC114 (CC: 109671149)
Switched Ethernet over PDH and E1, 2 E/FE, 2

E/FE/GE and 32 E1 120, 16 WAN ports (CC
109683508)
1655 AMU
Switched Ethernet over PDH and E1, 2 E/FE, 2
E/FE/GE and 32 E1 75, 16 WAN ports (CC
109683516)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
5-9
Issue 1 March 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)
1655 AMU SL-14/8 option card, 8 STM-1 or 2

STM-4 (CC 109579904)
3900
29
1655 AMU Fan
4800
24
1655 AMU AC-1 Adapter card for legacy option

card support in 2m/4o subrack (CC: 109509653)
3420
33
1655 AMU E3/DS3_E14 option card, three

switched 34/45 Mbit/s interfaces on DIN1.6/5.6
coaxial connectors and 4 E1 interfaces on RJ45
(2 E1 interfaces per RJ45). (CC: 109655225)
2700
42
The next table lists the failure rate calculation (FIT) and the MTBF (Mean Time
Between Failures) of the different legacy option cards (calculated according to SR-332
RPP with confidence level of 60% therefore it may not be comparable to other
Alcatel-Lucent Products):
1655 AMU Products
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)
1170
98
1176
97
1181
97
1655 AMU - optional 4 X4IP option card (CC:

108865064)
1813
63
1655 AMU X8PL - optional 8 Ethernet PL option

card (CC: 109480707)
947
121
1655 AMU - optional 16 DS1

X16DS1 option card (CC: 108756081)
1655 AMU - optional 2 E3
X2E3-V2 option card (CC: 108756107)
1655 AMU - optional 2 DS3

X2DS3-V2 option card
(CC: 108756099)
The next table lists the failure rate calculation (FIT) and the MTBF (Mean Time
Between Failures) of the different SFPs (calculated according to SR-332 RPP with
confidence level of 90% therefore it may not be comparable to other Alcatel-Lucent
Products):
1655 AMU Products
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)
1655 AMU STM-1 S1.1 SFP short range (CC:

109469809)
250
457
1655 AMU STM-1 L1.1 SFP middle range (CC:

109469825)
250
457
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
5-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)
1655 AMU STM-1 L1.2 SFP long range (CC:

109469817)
250
457
1655 AMU STM-4 S4.1 SFP short range (CC:

109509687)
250
457
1655 AMU STM-4 L4.1 SFP middle range (CC:

109509695)
250
457
1655 AMU STM-4 L4.2 SFP long range (CC:

109509703)
250
457

(CC: 109543561)
250
457
1655 AMU STM-1/STM-4 1490, single fiber

bidirectional SFP (CC: 109559492)
250
457
1655 AMU STM-16 Intra-office optical SFP (V16.1) 1310nm, 2 km (CC: 109509711)
1136
92
1655 AMU STM-16 short haul optical SFP (S16.1) 1310nm, 15 km (CC: 109509729)
1136
92
1655 AMU STM-16 long haul optical SFP (L16.1) 1310nm, 40 km (CC: 109509737)
1136
92
1655 AMU STM-16 long haul optical SFP (L16.2/3) 1550nm, 80 km (CC: 109509745)
1136
92
1655 AMU STM-4/16 SFP, Short Haul, 8 channel

CWDM - SH 40 km - 1550 nm, color 1 (CC:
109620385)
1136
92

109620393)
1136
92

109620401)
1136
92

109620419)
1136
92

109620427)
1136
92

109620435)
1136
92

109620443)
1136
92
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
5-11
Issue 1 March 2009
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
FIT (10-9/h)
MTBF (years)

109620450)
1136
92
1655 AMU STM-16 Long Haul, 8 channel CWDM

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 1 (CC: 109620468)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 2 (CC: 109620476)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 3 (CC: 109620484)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 4 (CC: 109620492)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 5 (CC: 109620500)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 6(CC: 109620518)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 7 (CC: 109620526)
1136
92

- LH 80 km - 1550 nm, color 8 (CC: 109620534)
1136
92
1655 AMU STM-1/STM-4 1310, single fiber

bidirectional SFP (CC: 109559500)
294
388
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, ZX 1550 nm

(CC: 109534347)
780
104
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, LX 1300 nm

(CC: 109526491)
653
104
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, SX 850 nm (CC:

109526483)
402
284
1655 AMU Fast Ethernet SFP - 100BASE-LX,

Single mode, 1310 nm (CC: 109643759)
450
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet - Single Fiber

Working, 1310 nm (upstream) (CC: 109606657)
294
388
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet - Single Fiber

Working, 1490 nm (downstream) (CC: 109606665)
294
388
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
5-12
Product support
6
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides information about the support for the 1655 AMU.
Contents
6-1
6-3
6-5
Technical support
6-7
6-8
Training support
6-8
Warranty
6-9
Standard repair
6-9
This section describes the installation services available to support 1655 AMU.
Alcatel-Lucent offers Installation Services focused on providing the technical support
and resources needed to efficiently and cost-effectively install your network equipment.
Alcatel-Lucents Installation Services provide unparalleled network implementation
expertise to help install your wireline and wireless networks. We use state-of-the-art
tools and technology, and highly skilled technicians to install your equipment and help
to ensure the timely and complete implementation of your network solution. By relying
on our installation experts, we can rapidly build or expand your network, help manage
the complexity of implementing new technologies, reduce operational costs, and help
improve your competitive position by enabling your staff to focus on the core aspects
of your business rather than focusing on infrastructure details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
6-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Within Alcatel-Lucents overall Installation Services portfolio, Basic Equipment

Installation and Site Supplemental Installation are the two services most closely linked
to the initial deployment of Alcatel-Lucent products into your network.
Basic equipment installation
Provides the resources, experience and tools necessary to install the 1655 AMU
product into your network. We assemble, cable and wire, and test the 1655 AMU,
helping to ensure it is fully functioning as engineered and specified.
Site supplemental installation
Enhances the Basic Equipment Installation service by performing supplemental work

that is unique to your specific site location, configuration, or working requirements.
Includes installation of material other than the main footprint product (such as
earthquake bracing); provision of services unique to your site (such as, hauling and
hoisting, multi-floor cabling, rental and local purchases) or as may be required by your
operations (such as, overtime to meet your compressed schedules, night work requested
by you, abnormal travel expenses, abnormal transportation or warehousing); and any
other additional effort or charges associated with your environment.
Benefits
When implementing our Installation Services, Alcatel-Lucent becomes a strategic

partner in helping you realize your long-term strategies and achieve your business and
technological goals. We combine our state-of-the-art technical background, high-quality
processes, expertise in the latest technologies, knowledge of revolutionary equipment
breakthroughs, and feature-rich project management tools to get your network up and
running - quickly, efficiently, and reliably. With Alcatel-Lucent, you can concentrate on
your core business, while we apply our years of knowledge and experience to installing
your network.
Our Installation Services let you:
Rapidly expand your network by turning hardware into working systems, with
the capability to deploy multiple networks in parallel rollouts
Reduce operational expense of recruiting, training, and retaining skilled

installation personnel
Leverage Alcatel-Lucent s resources and expertise by utilizing our team of

knowledgeable and fully equipped experts that implement projects of any size,
anywhere around the world
Implement quality assurance through our total quality management approach
Reduce operational expenses by avoiding the purchase of the necessary

state-of-the-art tools, test equipment, specialized test software, and spare parts that
Alcatel-Lucent Installation Services utilize
Ensure high-quality support with Alcatel-Lucents extensive support structure,
including proven methods and procedures, mechanized tools, professional training,
and technical support.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
6-2
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
For more information about specialized installation services and/or database

preparation, please contact your local Account Executive.
This section describes the engineering services available to support 1655 AMU.
Alcatel-Lucent Worldwide Services offers Engineering Services focused on providing
the technical support and resources needed to efficiently and cost-effectively engineer
your network equipment. We provide the best, most economical equipment solution by
ensuring your network equipment is configured correctly, works as specified, and is
ready for installation upon delivery. With our proven, end-to-end solutions and
experienced network engineering staff, Alcatel-Lucent Worldwide Services is the ideal
partner to help service providers engineer and implement the technology that supports
their business.
Description
Within Alcatel-Lucents overall Engineering Services portfolio, Site Survey, Basic

Equipment Engineering, Site Engineering, and Site Records are the four services most
closely linked to the initial deployment of 1655 AMU into your network; each is
described below.
Site Survey
A Site Survey may be required to collect your site requirements needed for proper
equipment engineering. If adequate site requirements and records are not available up
front, a site survey would be performed to collect information required for
configuration of the equipment and integration of the equipment into the site.
Basic equipment engineering
Ensures that the correct footprint hardware is ordered and that the ordered equipment is
configured for optimal performance in the network for the customer. Alcatel-Lucent
Engineering configures equipment requirements based on inputs from the customer
order, completed questionnaires, and/or site survey data. The decisions as to specific
equipment needs are based on each components functionality and capacity, and the
application of engineering rules associated with each component.
Site engineering
Ensures that the correct site material is ordered and that the optimal equipment layout
for the installation of the ordered equipment in the customers site is determined. Site
Engineering will be used in assisting the customer with determining the necessary site
conditions, layout and equipment required to properly install/integrate the footprint
hardware components into a specific location.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
6-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Site records
Site Records Service provides detailed record keeping which accurately documents the
physical placement and configuration of specified customer equipment. Depending on
the customer request, this can involve the initial creation of site records, updating of
existing records, or ongoing maintenance of the customers records.
Benefits
When implementing our Engineering Services, Alcatel-Lucent becomes a strategic

partner in helping you realize your long-term strategies and achieve your business and
technological goals. Our Engineering Services portfolio delivers quick, responsive
support, with state-of-the-art tools, top technicians and end-to-end services to help you
engineer an optimal network solution. Whether you are looking to outsource your total
engineering effort or simply supplement basic coverage gaps, our portfolio of services
provides the flexible level of support you need. With Alcatel-Lucent, you can
concentrate on your core business while we apply our years of knowledge and
experience in engineering your equipment solutions.
Our Engineering Services let you:
Rapidly expand your network by turning products into working systems, with
the capability to deploy multiple networks in parallel rollouts
Reduce costs by determining the most cost-effective network configuration and
optimal use of office space when planning and providing an equipment solution
Reduce operational expense of recruiting, training, and retaining skilled

engineering personnel
Leverage Alcatel-Lucents resources and expertise by utilizing our team of

knowledgeable and fully equipped experts that can plan, design, and implement
projects of any size, anywhere around the world
Implement quality assurance through our total quality management approach

and use of ISO-certified processes
Provide onestop shopping with a globally deployed engineering workforce, saving
the time, delays and coordination challenges of dealing with multiple equipment
vendors and service providers
Keep pace with rapidly changing technology by supporting the latest

technologies and equipment breakthroughs, including Alcatel-Lucents and other
vendors products
Ensure high-quality support with Alcatel-Lucents extensive support structure,

including proven methods and procedures, mechanized tools, professional training,
technical support, and access to Bell Labs
Maintain and track vital office records keep track of equipment locations and
connections.
Reference
For more information about specialized engineering services, engineering consultations,

and/or database preparation, please contact your local Account Executive.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
6-4
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes the maintenance services available to support 1655 AMU.
Description
Maintenance Services is composed of three primary services to support your

maintenance needs. The services are
Remote Technical Support Service (RTS)

On-site Technical Support Service (OTS)
Repair and Exchange Services (RES)
Remote Technical Support Service (RTS)
RTS provides remote technical support and Software Patches and Software Updates, as
available, for deployed Alcatel-Lucent network elements to help cost-effectively
maximize network availability and performance. With this service, system engineers
deliver remote support via phone or modem connection for rapid response, diagnosis,
and resolution of system outages and issues.
Support from our expert remote system engineers will:
enable trouble tracking, resolution, and restoration
answer technical product-related questions and specific feature and function

questions
help identify and apply available Software Patches and Software Updates on
Covered Products.
Single Point of Contact access to Alcatel-Lucent engineers and information to help

identify and resolve technical issues via phone or modem.
Alcatel-Lucent OnLine Customer Support
web-based tracking and management of Assistance Requests (AR)

self-help services i.e., Knowledge Database, Documentation, E-mail.
Service Options
Premium RTS: 24 hours a day, 7 days a week (24 7)

Standard RTS: 8 hours a day (8 am 5 pm Client local time) 5 days per week (8
5), Monday - Friday, excluding Alcatel-Lucent holidays.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
6-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Product support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On-site Technical Support (OTS)
OTS provides cost-effective support for Alcatel-Lucent products including systems that
incorporate select third-party equipment.
OTS Dispatched Technician Alcatel-Lucent will dispatch a technician to your

location to provide on-site assistance. We offer multiple coverage options to meet
your needs from same-day dispatch, with 24 7 or 8 5 response, to
next-business-day dispatch, with 8 5 response.
OTS Dedicated Technician a Alcatel-Lucent technician works at your location to
perform daily maintenance tasks that keep your system running at peak
performance.
OTS Dedicated Engineer an expert Alcatel-Lucent engineer provides you with
customized on-site support and assistance in areas such as maintenance of new
equipment, administration of software releases, and support with your
administrative processes.
Repair and Exchange Services (RES)
RES provides rapid replacement or repair of your defective hardware, eliminating the
need for you to purchase and maintain a costly spares inventory. These services can
dramatically reduce investment capital and recurring operating expenses while helping
to assure maximum network availability. RES offers
Same Day Advanced Exchange delivers a replacement part to Customer

equipment site within four hours to enable rapid restoration of service to equipment
and the ability to return parts to Alcatel-Lucent later. We have established an
infrastructure of multi-point, overlapping-coverage field stocking locations and
automated electronic process controls that help us approach a 100% on-time
delivery track record.
Next Day Advanced Exchange delivers a replacement part on the very next day,
7 days a week, including holidays. Consider what is at risk when you compare this
service to a business day program.
Return for Repair is an economical solution, which allows the Customer to
return your field-replaceable parts to Alcatel-Lucent for repair or replacement.
Alcatel-Lucent returns them in a very timely manner and without unexpected repair
fees.
Contact
For maintenance service contact information please refer to Technical support

(p. 6-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
6-6
Product support
Technical support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical support
This section describes the technical support available for 1655 AMU.
Services
1655 AMU are complemented by a full range of services available to support planning,
maintaining, and operating your system. Applications testing, network integration, and
upgrade/conversion support is also available.
Technical support groups
Technical support is available through
Local/Regional Customer Support (LCS/RCS)

Technical Support Service (TSS).
Contacting your LCS/RCS
LCS/RCS personnel troubleshoot field problems 24 hours a day over the phone and on
site (if necessary) based on Alcatel-Lucent Service Contracts:
for Europe, Africa, Asia and the
pacific region (EMEA and
APAC)
International Customer Management Centre (ICMC):
+353 1 692 4579 (toll number)
For technical assistance, call your Local/Regional Customer Support Team. If the
request cannot be solved by LCS/RCS, it will be escalated to the central Technical
Support Service (TSS) team in Hilversum, Netherlands.
Technical support service
Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support Service (TSS) organization is committed to providing

customers with quality product support services. Each segment of the TSS organization
regards the customer as its highest priority and understands your obligations to
maintain quality services for your customers.
The TSS team maintains direct contact with Alcatel-Lucent manufacturing, Bell
Laboratories development, and other organizations to assure fast resolution of all
assistance requests.
Technical support platform
A global online trouble tracking system is used by all support teams to track customer
assistance requests. The system communicates details about product bulletins,
troubleshooting procedures, and other critical information to customers. All details of a
request are entered into this database until closure. For online access to your trouble
tickets via the web please contact your local support team or check the following
website: (https://support.lucent.com/support)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
6-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Product support
Technical support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference
For additional information about technical support, please contact your Account
Executive for 1655 AMU or your Alcatel-Lucent local Customer Team.
Alcatel-Lucent provides comprehensive product documentation tailored to the needs of
the different audiences. An overview of the documentation set can be found at Related
documentation (p. xviii).
Customer comment
As customer satisfaction is extremely important to Alcatel-Lucent, every attempt is

made to encourage feedback from customers about our information products. Thank
you for your feedback.
To comment on this information product online, go to http://www.lucent-info.com/
comments/enus/.
Training support
To complement your product needs, the Alcatel-Lucent Learning organization offers a
formal training package, with the single training courses scheduled regularly at
Alcatel-Lucent corporate training centers or to be arranged as on-site trainings at your
facility.
Registering for a course or arranging an on-site training
To enroll in a training course at one of the Alcatel-Lucent corporate training centers or

to arrange an on-site training at your facility (suitcasing), please contact:
Asia, Pacific, and
China
Training Center Singapore, Singapore

voice: +65 6240 8394
fax: +65 6240 8017
Central America and

Latin America
Training Center Mexico City, Mexico

voice: +52 55 527 87187
fax: +52 55 527 87185
Europe, Middle East,

and Africa
Training Center Nuremberg, Germany

voice: +49 911 526 3831
fax: +49 911 526 6142
North American Region
Training Center Altamonte Springs, USA

+1-888-582-3688 - prompt 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
6-8
Product support
Training support
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To review the available courses or to enroll in a training course at one of

Alcatel-Lucents corporate training centers you can also visit: https://training.lucent.
com/Saba/Web/Main
Warranty
Introduction
Warranty, support, and trouble escalation procedures have been established on a per
country basis. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent account representative for details.
Discontinued Availability
Alcatel-Lucent reserves the right to notify the customer in advance of the intention to
Discontinue the Availability (DA) of a product. Alcatel-Lucent also reserves the right
to offer a Technical Support Contract (TSC) to make repair and technical support
services available for an additional period of time after a product has been
discontinued. All TSC services will be at a specified price dependent on the terms and
conditions of the contract.
The rights and obligations of Alcatel-Lucent and the customer shall neither be assigned
nor delegated without prior written consent of the other party, except that
Alcatel-Lucent may assign its obligations to any of its affiliates or non-Alcatel-Lucent
contractors without further consent by the customer.
Standard repair
Introduction
If Alcatel-Lucent determines that a product is not defective or is in conformance, the

customer shall pay Alcatel-Lucent the costs of handling, inspecting, testing, and
transporting the product and, if applicable, travel and related expenses.
Repair interval
Alcatel-Lucent repair locations set their own standards for return intervals. On average,
the minimum time to return repairs to the customer is 14 days from the receipt of the
product by the repair location. The maximum time to return repairs to the customer can
range from 50 to 180 days.
Out-of-Warranty provisions
For any activity associated with repair or replacement of hardware and/or software
systems that is determined by Alcatel-Lucent to be out of warranty, materials and labor
will be billed at Alcatel-Lucent list price (time-and-materials plus additional incurred
expenses), or in accordance with a separate Technical Support Contract.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
6-9
Issue 1 March 2009
Product support
Standard repair
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
International repair and service
The customer or the customers in-country representative should send a description of

the material to be returned for repair or service including the quantity, comcodes, and
serial numbers (if available).
After the material has been shipped, the following information should be faxed to the
Service Center:
Customers return address

Customer contact name, telephone number, and fax number
Value of material
Identification of any hazardous equipment or material

Shipping information including the date of shipment, air way bill, carrier name,
flight number, number of cartons, and weight of material.
When the material arrives at the Service Center, it is entered into the Repair, Service,
and Return database for tracking purposes.
The repair location will repair the material. If it is determined that an item is not
repairable and the item is under factory warranty, a replacement will be sent. If the
item is out of factory warranty, the customer will advise their Country Desk
Representative if they would like to order a replacement.
The Service Center will prepare the paperwork for exporting the material, and ship the
material to the customer. When available, the Service Center will fax the shipping
information to the customer or the customers in-country representative.
Upon receipt of the material, the customer or the customers in-country representative
should send the Service Center the order numbers of the material received and the date
the material was received. The Service Center will then close the order on the Repair,
Service, and Return database.
Important! Please note that Alcatel-Lucent warranty is contingent upon the use of
Alcatel-Lucent specified SFPs for 1655 AMU. Use of other SFPs is not approved
by Alcatel-Lucent and is fully at the customers own risk. Any warranty obligation
of Alcatel-Lucent is extinguished when non-Alcatel-Lucent specified SFPs are used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
6-10
Ordering
7
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of the ordering process and the current ordering
information for 1655 AMU.
The different comcodes listed hereafter can change. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent
representative for updated information.
Contents
7-1
1655 AMU has been carefully engineered and all equipment kitted to simplify the
ordering process. In this section the current ordering information are shown, as
available on the issue date of this document.
Contact and further information
For all questions concerning ordering of 1655 AMU, for any information about the
marketable items and their comcodes, and for ordering the equipment please contact
your Account Executive for 1655 AMU or your Alcatel-Lucent local customer team.
Orderable 1655 AMU products
The tables below list the comcodes of the 1655 AMU Products. Software needs to be
ordered together with the network element. To get the ordering information for
available software versions, please contact your local customer team.
The following table is intended to give an overview of the orderable 1655 AMU
products. For installation guidelines, please refer the 1655 AMU Installation Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
7-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
Comments
ASC110
109588954 1655 AMU main card with

2 multirate STM-1/4 and
2 multirate STM-4/16.
DC power supply, one
power connector with each
main card (CC: 408887883)
with strain relief (CC:
408887875) will be
delivered.
ASC101B
109555516 1655 AMU main card with

2 multirate STM-1/4 and
2 STM-1. DC power
supply, one power
connector with each main
card (CC:408887883) with
strain relief
(CC:408887875) will be
delivered.
1655 AMU subrack 2m/4o, vertical

mount
ASH101
109509752 1655 AMU subrack with 2

main and 4 option card
slots for vertical mounting.
1655 AMU subrack 1m/1o, vertical and

horizontal mount
ASH102
109509778 1655 AMU subrack, 1 main

and 1 option card slot,
vertical and horizontal
mounting. No legacy card
is supported. Note: For
mounting, please follow the
mounting procedures
provided in the 1655 AMU
Installation Guide.
1655 AMU Adapter card for legacy

option card support in 1655 AMU
2m/4o subrack (occupies two slots in
subrack) - AC-1 Adapter card
ASC103
109509653 Adapter card for 1655

AMU 2m/4o subrack for
usage of a legacy option
board in 1655 AMU 2m/4o
subracks (occupies two
slots in subrack)
1655 AMU Heat Baffle (ETSI or 19

Rack Mounting)
408905057 -

- PI-E1/63 option card
ASC102
109509679 1655 AMU option card 63

2 Mbit/s, 120
1655 AMU option card 63 E1 75 PI-E1/63_75 option card
ASC104
109535468 1655 AMU option card 63

2 Mbit/s, 75
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
7-2
Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
1655 AMU Ethernet PL and E1 - 2

E/FE, 2 FE/GE and 4 E1(120 or 75 )
interfaces - EPL4_E14 option card
ASC105
109543504 1655 AMU Ethernet private

line card with 2 E/FE, 2
FE/GE + 4 E1(120 or
75 ) interfaces

E/FE and 32 E1 (120 ) - EPL4_E132
option card
ASC106
109543512 1655 AMU option card

Ethernet private line + E1 4
E/FE + 32 E1 (120 )

E/FE and 32 E1 (75 ) EPL4_E132_75 option card
ASC107
109543520 1655 AMU option card

Ethernet private line + E1 4
E/FE + 32 x E1 (75 )
1655 AMU option card - optional 2

E/FE, 2 x E/FE/GE interfaces and 4 E1
interfaces - ESW4_E14 option card
ASC108
109579896 1655 AMU - 2 E/FE, 2 x

E/FE/GE interfaces and 4
(75/120 ) interfaces, 8
WAN ports
1655 AMU option card, 8 STM-1 or

2 STM-4 - SI-14/8 option card
ASC109
109579904 1655 AMU option card, 8

STM-1 or 2 STM-4
1655 AMU E3/DS3_E14 option card
ASC111
109655225 Three switched 34/45

Mbit/s interfaces on
DIN1.6/5.6 coaxial
connectors and 4 E1
interfaces on RJ45 (2 E1
interfaces per RJ45).
1655 AMU
ASC112
109683508 Switched Ethernet over

PDH and E1, 2 E/FE, 2
E/FE/GE and 32 E1 120,
16 WAN ports
ASC113
109683516 Switched Ethernet over

PDH and E1, 2 E/FE, 2
E/FE/GE and 32 E1 75,
16 WAN ports
1655 AMU Main Card - MI-16/1
ASC114
109671149 1655 AMUmain card with

one multirate STM-4/16.
Power supply filter and
dual power interfaces for
up to 150 W system power.
1655 AMU subrack 6H (2m/4o),

horizontal mount
ASH111
109667824 1655 AMU street cabinet

shelf with 2 main and 4
option slots, horizontal
mount, and integrated fan
EOP4_E132 (120) option card
1655 AMU
EOP4_E132_75 (75) option card
Comments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
7-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus
code
Comcode
Comments
1655 AMU subrack 2H (1m/1o),

horizontal mount
ASH112
109667832 1655 AMU street cabinet

shelf with one main and
one option slot, horizontal
mount, and integrated fan
1655 AMU fan for 6H subrack
ASF101
109667840 Required for spare only
1655 AMU fan for 2H subrack
ASF102
109667857 Required for spare only
1655 AMU Basic vertical mounting kit

- ETSI compliant
ASX001B
849029335 1655 AMU 2m/4o and

1m/1o vertical mounting kit
for ETSI racks
1655 AMU Basic vertical mounting kit

- 19 - ETSI compliant
ASX002B
849029343 1655 AMU 2m/4o and

1m/1o vertical mounting kit
for 19 racks
1655 AMU 1m/1o horizontal mounting

kit - ETSI compliant
ASX005B
849029350 1655 AMU 1m/1o

horizontal mounting kit for
ETSI racks
1655 AMU 1m/1o horizontal mounting

kit - 19
ASX006B
849029368 1655 AMU 1m/1o

horizontal mounting kit for
19 racks
1655 AMU Basic mounting kit 19 40

mm recessed
ASX007B
849029376 1655 AMU 2m/4o and

1m/1o mounting kit for
19 40mm recessed racks
1655 AMU Fan Kit
ASX008
849029384 1655 AMU Fan kit for

2m/4o subrack, includes 2
AMU Fans
1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack horizontal

mounting kit 19
ASX009
849035456 1655 AMU 1m/1o

horizontal mounting kit
19 - 40 mm offset
1655 AMU Fans
ASH104
109509786 1655 AMU Fan for 1m/1o

subrack and spare for
2m/4o subrack
1655 AMU blank face plate 40 mm
ASX004
109509802 To cover unused main slot

positions.
1655 AMU blank face plate 32 mm
ASX003
109509794 To cover unused option slot

positions.
1655 AMU legacy option cards
The table below lists the comcodes of the 1655 AMU option cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
7-4
Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Apparatus code
Comcodes
1655 AMU - optional 8 Ethernet PL option

card. AC-1 adapter card required to operate in
1655 AMU
X8PL
109480707
1655 AMU - optional 4 10/100BASE-T LAN

interfaces option card. AC-1 adapter card
required to operate in 1655 AMU.
X4IP
108865064
1655 AMU - optional 2 E3 option card
X2E3-V2
108756107
1655 AMU - optional 2 DS3 option card. AC-1

adapter card required to operate in 1655 AMU.
X2DS3-V2
108756099
1655 AMU - optional 16 DS1 option card. AC-1

adapter card required to operate in 1655 AMU.
X16DS1
108756081
1655 AMU SFPs

1655 AMU Products
Comcodes
1655 AMU STM-1/STM-4 Bidirectional SFP (1550 nm) Downstream 40

km
109671438
1655 AMU STM-16 short haul optical 1310 nm (15 km)
109509729
1655 AMU STM-16 Intra-office optical 1310 nm (2 km)
109509711
1655 AMU STM-1/STM-4 Bidirectional SFP (1310 nm) Upstream

40KM
109671446
1655 AMU STM-16 long haul optical 1310 nm (40 km)
109509737
1655 AMU STM-16 long haul optical 1550 nm (80 km)
109509745
1655 AMU STM-4/16 SFP, Short Haul, 8 channel CWDM - SH 40 km 1550 nm, color 1
109620385
109620393
109620401
109620419
109620427
109620435
109620443
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
7-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1655 AMU Products
Comcodes
109620450
1655 AMU STM-16 Long Haul, 8 channel CWDM - LH 80 km - 1550

nm, color 1
109620468

nm, color 2
109620476

nm, color 3
109620484

nm, color 4
109620492

nm, color 5
109620500
1655 AMU STM-16 Long Haul, 8 channel CWDM - LH 80km 1550nm, color 6
109620518
1655 AMU STM-16 Long Haul, 8 channel CWDM - LH 80km 1550nm, color 7
109620526

nm, color 8
109620534
1655 AMU STM-1 S1.1 SFP short range
109469809
1655 AMU STM-1 L1.1 SFP middle range
109469825
1655 AMU STM-1 L1.2 SFP long range
109469817
1655 AMU STM-4 S4.1 SFP short range
109509687
1655 AMU STM-4 L4.1 SFP middle range
109509695
1655 AMU STM-1 L4.2 SFP long range
109509703
109543561
1655 AMU STM-1/STM-4 1490, single fiber bidirectional SFP
109559492
1655 AMU STM-1/STM-4 1310, single fiber bidirectional SFP
109559500
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, SX 850 nm
109526483
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, LX 1300 nm
109526491
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, ZX 1550 nm
109534347
1655 AMU Fast Ethernet SFP - 100BASE-LX, single mode, 1310 nm
109643759
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, Single Fiber Working, 1310 nm

(upstream)
109606657
1655 AMU Gigabit Ethernet SFP, Single Fiber Working, 1490 nm

(downstream)
109606665
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
7-6
Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommended cables
Please refer to the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Installation Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
7-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Appendix A: An SDH overview
Overview
Purpose
This chapter briefly describes the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
In 1988, the ITU-T (formerly CCITT) came to an agreement on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH). The corresponding ITU-T Recommendation G.707 forms the
basis of a global, uniform optical transmission network. SDH can operate with
plesiochronous networks and therefore allows the continuous evolution of existing
digital transmission networks.
The major features and advantages of SDH are:
Compatibility of transmission equipment and networks on a worldwide basis
Uniform physical interfaces

Easy cross connection of signals in the network nodes
Possibility of transmitting PDH (Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy) tributary signals

at bit rates commonly used at present
Simple adding and dropping of individual channels without special multiplexers

(add/drop facility)
Easy transition to higher transmission rates
Due to the standardization of the network element functions SDH supports a

superordinate network management and new monitoring functions and provides
transport capacity and protocols (Telecommunication Management Network, TMN)
for this purpose in the overheads of the multiplex signals.
High flexibility and user-friendly monitoring possibilities, e.g. end-to-end

monitoring of the bit error ratio.
Purpose of SDH
The basic purpose of SDH is to provide a standard synchronous optical hierarchy with
sufficient flexibility to accommodate digital signals that currently exist in todays
network, as well as those planned for the future.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
A-1
Issue 1 March 2009
An SDH overview
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH currently defines standard rates and formats and optical interfaces. Today,
mid-span meet is possible at the optical transmission level. These and other related
issues continue to evolve through the ITU-T committees.
ITU-T addressed issues
The set of ITU-T Recommendations defines
Optical parameters
Multiplexing schemes to map existing digital signals (PDH) into SDH payload
signals
Overhead channels to support standard operation, administration, maintenance, and

provisioning (OAM&P) functions
Criteria for optical line Automatic Protection Switch (APS)
References
For more detailed information on SDH, refer to
ITU-T Recommendation G.703, Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical

digital interfaces, October 1996
ITU-T Recommendation G.707, Network Node Interface For The Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH), March 1996
ITU-T Recommendation G.780, Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital

hierarchy (SDH) networks and equipment , November 1993
ITU-T Recommendation G.783, Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

(SDH) Multiplexing Equipment Functional Blocks , April 1997
ITU-T Recommendation G.784, Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

Management , January 1994
ITU-T Recommendation G.785, Characteristics of a flexible multiplexer in a
synchronous digital hierarchy environment , November 1996
ITU-T Recommendation G.813, Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave
clocks (SEC), August 1996
ITU-T Recommendation G.823, The control of jitter and wander within digital
networks which are based on the 2048-kbit/s hierarchy, March 1993
ITU-T Recommendation G.825, The control of jitter and wander within digital
networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH), March
1993
ITU-T Recommendation G.826, Error performance Parameters and Objectives for

International, Constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or Above the Primary Rate,
February 1999
ITU-T Recommendation G.957, Optical interfaces for equipments and systems
relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy, July 1995
Contents
A-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
A-2
An SDH overview
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-4
SDH frame structure
A-7
A-9
SDH interface
A-10
A-11
A-11
SDH transport rates
A-12

This section describes the basics of the SDH hierarchy.
STM-1 frame
The SDH signal hierarchy is based on a basic building block frame called the
Synchronous Transport Module 1 (STM-1), as shown in SDH STM-1 frame (p. A-4).
The STM-1 frame has a rate of 8000 frames per second and a duration of 125
microseconds
The STM-1 frame consists of 270 columns and 9 rows.
Each cell in the matrix represents an 8-bit byte.
Transmitting signals
The STM-1 frame (STM = Synchronous Transport Module) is transmitted serially

starting from the left with row 1 column 1 through column 270, then row 2 column 1
through 270, continuing on, row-by-row, until all 2430 bytes (9x270) of the STM-1
frame have been transmitted. Because each STM-1 frame consists of 2430 bytes and
each byte has 8 bits, the frame contains 19440 bits a frame. There are 8000 STM-1
frames a second, at the STM-1 signal rate of 155.520.000 (19440 x 8000) kbit/s.
Three higher bit rates are also defined:
622.080 Mbit/s (STM-4)

2488.320 Mbit/s (STM-16)
9953.280 Mbit/s (STM-64)
39813.120 Mbit/s (STM-256)
The bit rates of the higher order hierarchy levels are integer multiples of the STM-1
transmission rate.
SDH STM-1 frame
The following figure illustrates the SDH STM-1 frame.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
A-3
Issue 1 March 2009
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Section overhead (SOH)
The first nine bytes of each row with exception of the fourth row are part of the SOH
(Section OverHead). The first nine byte of the fourth row contain the AU pointer (AU
= Administrative Unit).
STM-1 payload
Columns 10 through 270 (the remainder of the frame), are reserved for payload
signals.

This section describes and illustrates the SDH path and line sections.
SDH layers
SDH divides its processing functions into the following three path and line sections:
Regenerator section
Multiplex section
Path
These three path and line sections are associated with
Equipment that reflects the natural divisions in network spans

Overhead bytes that carry information used by various network elements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
A-4
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment layers
The following table lists and defines each SDH equipment path and line section.
Path and line
sections
Definition
Regenerator section
A regenerator section describes the section between two network

elements. The network elements, however, do not necessarily
have to be regenerators.
Multiplex section
A multiplex section is the section between two multiplexers. A

multiplex section is defined as that part of a path where no
multiplexing or demultiplexing of the STM-N frame takes place.
Path
A path is the logical signal connection between two termination

points.
A path can be composed of a number of multiplex sections
which themselves can consist of several regenerator sections.
Path, MS and RS
The following figure illustrates the equipment path, multiplex sections and regenerator
sections in a signal path.
Overhead bytes
The following table lists and defines the overhead associated with each SDH path and
line section.
Overhead byte
section
Definition
Regenerator section
Contains information that is used by all SDH equipment

including repeaters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
A-5
Issue 1 March 2009
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead byte
section
Definition
Multiplex section
Used by all SDH equipment except repeaters.
Path
The POH contains all the additional signals of the respective

hierarchy level so that a VC can be transmitted and switched
through independently of its contents.
SDH frame
The following figure illustrates the SDH frame sections and its set of overhead bytes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
A-6
An SDH overview
SDH frame structure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH frame structure

This section provides detailed information on the locations and functions of various
overhead bytes for each of the following SDH path and line sections:
Regenerator Section
Multiplex Section
Path
Section overhead
The following table identifies the location and function of each regenerator section
overhead byte.
Bytes
Function
A1, A2
Frame alignment A1 = 1111 0110 ; A2 = 0010 1000 ; These

fixed-value bytes are used for synchronization.
B1
BIP-8 parity test

Regenerator section error monitoring; BIP-8 :
Computed over all bits of the previous frame after scrambling; B1 is
placed into the SOH before scrambling;
BIP-X: (Bit Interleaved Parity X bits) Even parity, X-bit code;
first bit of code = even parity over first bit of all X-bit sequences;
B2
Multiplex section error monitoring; BIP-24 :

B2 is computed over all bits of the previous STM-1 frame except for
row 1 to 3 of the SOH (RSOH); B2 is computed after and placed
before scrambling;
Z0
Spare bytes
D1 - D3 (=
DCCR) D4 D12 (= DCC M)
Data Communication Channel (network management information

exchange)
E1
Orderwire channel
E2
Orderwire channel
F1
User channel
K1, K2
Automatic protection switch
K2
MS-AIS/RDI indicator
S1
Synchronization Status Message
M1
REI (Remote Error Indication) byte
NU
National Usage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
A-7
Issue 1 March 2009
An SDH overview
SDH frame structure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Path overhead
The Path Overhead (POH) is generated for all plesiochronous tributary signals in
accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.709. The POH provides for integrity of communication
between the point of assembly of a Virtual Container VC and its point of disassembly.
The following table shows the POH bytes and their functions.
Byte
Location and Function
J1
Path Trace Identifier byte
B3
Path Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP-8)

Provides each path performance monitoring. This byte is calculated
over all bits of the previous payload before scrambling.
C2
Signal Label
All 0 means unequipped; other and 00000001 means equipped
G1
Path Status
Conveys the STM-1 path terminating status, performance, and remote
defect indication (RDI) signal conditions back to an originating path
terminating equipment.
F2, F3
User Data Channel

Reserved for user communication.
H4
Multiframe Indicator
Provides a general multiframe indicator for VC-structured payloads.
K3
VC Trail protection.
N1
Tandem connection OH
AU pointer
The AU pointer together with the last 261 columns of the STM-1 frame forms an AUG
(Administrative Unit Group). An AUG may contain one AU-4 or three
byte-multiplexed AU-3s (an AU-3 is exactly one third of the size of an AU-4). AU-3s
are also compatible with the SONET standard (Synchronous Optical NETwork) which
is the predecessor of SDH (and still the prevailing technology within the USA). Three
byte-multiplexed STS frames (SONET frame), each containing one AU-3 can be
mapped into one STM-1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
A-8
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Digital multiplexing is SDHs method of byte mapping tributary signals to a higher
signal rate, which permits economical extraction of a single tributary signal without the
need to demultiplex the entire STM-1 payload. In addition, SDH provides overhead
channels for use by OAM&P groups.
The following figure illustrates the SDH technique of mapping tributary signals into
the STM frames.
1
C-4-256C
VC-4-256C
AU-4-256C
C-4-64C
VC-4-64C
AU-4-64C
C-4-16C
VC-4-16C
AU-4-16C
VC-4-4C
AU-4-4C
C-4-4C
VC-4
1
VC-3
TU-3
TUG-3
C-3
VC-2
TU-2
TU-12
STM-64
STM-16
STM-4
STM-1
AU-3
STM-0
TUG-2
VC-12
AUG-16
AUG-4
AUG-1
AU-4
AUG-64
STM-256
3
VC-3
C-12
C-4
C-2
AUG-256
Pointer processing
Multiplexing
Aligning
Mapping
C-11
VC-11
TU-11
Transporting SDH payloads
Tributary signals are mapped into a digital signal called a virtual container (VC). The
VC is a structure designed for the transport and switching of STM payloads. There are
various sizes of VCs: VC-11, VC-12, VC-2, VC-3, VC-4, VC-4-4C, VC-4-16C,
VC-4-64C and VC-4-256C.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
A-9
Issue 1 March 2009
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH Mapping Table
The following table shows the mapping possibilities of some digital signals into SDH
payloads.
Input tributary
Voice Channels
Rate
Mapped Into
1.5 Mbit/s
24
1.544 Mbit/s
VC-11
2 Mbit/s
32
2.048 Mbit/s
VC-12
6 Mbit/s
96
6.312 Mbit/s
VC-2
34 Mbit/s
672
34.368 Mbit/s
VC-3
45 Mbit/s
672
44.736 Mbit/s
VC-3
140 Mbit/s
2016
139.264 Mbit/s
VC-4
SDH interface
The SDH interface provides the optical mid-span meet between SDH network
elements. An SDH network element is the hardware and software that affects the
termination or repeating of an SDH standard signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
A-10
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SDH provides for multiplexing of 2-Mbit/s (C-12) and 34-Mbit/s (C-3) signals into an
STM-1 frame.
Furthermore, multiplexing paths also exist for the SONET specific 1.5-Mbit/s, 6-Mbit/s
and 45-Mbit/s signals.
Process
The following describes the process for multiplexing a 2-Mbit/s signal. The SDH
digital multiplexing (p. A-9) illustrates the multiplexing process.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Input 2-Mbit/s tributary is mapped
Each VC-12 carries a single 2-Mbit/s payload.

The VC-12 is aligned into a Tributary Unit TU-2 using a TU pointer.
Three TU-2 are then multiplexed into a Tributary Unit Group TUG-2.
Seven TUG-2 are multiplexed into an TUG-3.

Three TUG-3 are multiplexed into an VC-4.
The VC-4 is aligned into an Administrative Unit AU-4 using a AU pointer.
The AU-4 is mapped into an AUG which is then mapped into an STM-1 frame.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After VCs are multiplexed into the STM-1 payload, the section overhead is added.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scrambled STM-1 signal is transported to the optical stage.

Demultiplexing is the inverse of multiplexing. This topic describes how to demultiplex
a signal.
Process
The following describes the process for demultiplexing an STM-1 signal to a 2 Mbit/s
signal. The SDH digital multiplexing (p. A-9) illustrates the demultiplexing process.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The unscrambled STM-1 signal from the optical conversion stages is processed to
extract the path overhead and accurately locate the payload.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The STM-1 path overhead is processed to locate the VCs. The individual VCs are then
processed to extract VC overhead and, via the VC pointer, accurately locate the
2-Mbit/s signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
A-11
Issue 1 March 2009
An SDH overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 2-Mbit/s signal is desynchronized, providing a standard 2-Mbit/s signal to the

asynchronous network.
Key points
SDH STM pointers are used to locate the payload relative to the transport overhead.
Remember the following key points about signal demultiplexing:
The SDH frame is a fixed time (125 s) and no bit-stuffing is used.

The synchronous payload can float within the frame. This is to permit
compensation for small variations in frequency between the clocks of the two
systems that may occur if the systems are independently timed (plesiochronous
timing).
SDH transport rates

Higher rate STM-N frames are built through byte-multiplexing of N STM-1 signals.
Creating higher rate signals
A STM-N signal can only be multiplexed out of N STM-1 frames with their first A1
byte at the same position (i.e. the first A1 byte arriving at the same time).
STM-N frames are built through byte-multiplexing of N STM-1 signals. Not all bytes
of the multiplexed SOH (size = N x SOH of STM-1) are relevant in an STM-4/16.
For example there is only one B1 byte in an STM-4/16 frame which is computed the
same way as for an STM-1. Generally the SOH of the first STM-1 inside the STM-N
is used for SOH bytes that are needed only once. The valid bytes are given in ITU-T
G.707.
Designation
Line rate (Mbit/s)
Capacity
STM-1
155.520
1 AU-4 or 3 AU-3
STM-4
622.080
4 AU-4 or 12 AU-3
STM-16
2488.320
16 AU-4 or 48 AU-3
STM-64
9953.280
64 AU-4 or 192 AU-3
STM-256
39813.120
256 AU-4 or 768 AU-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
A-12
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AC
Alternating Current
ACU
Alarm Collection Unit. Radio Relay circuit pack that collects of equipment alarms,
analogue measurements from internal monitoring points and calculation data.
ADM
Add-Drop Multiplexer
Administrative Unit (AU)
Carrier for TUs

Administrative-Unit Pointer (AU PTR)
Indicates the phase alignment of the VC-n with respect to the STM-N frame. The pointer
position is fixed with respect to the STM-N frame.
Administrator
Lucent NMS Administrator.

Agent
Performs operations on managed objects and issues events on behalf of these managed
objects. All SDH managed objects will support at least one agent. Control of distant
agents is possible via local Managers.
Alarm
The notification (audible or visual) of a significant event. See also Event.

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Code transmitted downstream in a digital Network that shows that an upstream failure
has been detected and also alarmed if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed. Also
called to as All OneS.
Alarm Severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The way in which alarms are
processed depends on the severity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aligning
Using a pointer to indicate the head of a virtual container, e.g. to create an

Administrative Unit (AU) or a Tributary Unit (TU).
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)
A line code that employs a ternary signal to convert binary digits. In this line code
successive binary ones are represented by signal elements that are normally of
alternately positive and negative polarity but are equal in amplitude, binary zeros are
represented by signal elements that have zero amplitude.
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
A standard 8-bit code that is used to exchange information among data processing
systems and associated equipment.
Anomaly
A difference between the actual and the desired operation of a function.

ANSI
American National Standards Institute

APS
Automatic Protection Switching

AS
Alarm Suppression assembly

Assembly
Gathering together of payload data with overhead and pointer information (an indication
of the direction of the signal).
Association
A logical connection between manager and agent through which management information
can be exchanged.
Asynchronous
See Non-synchronous.
ATC
Auxiliary Transmission Channel

ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU
Administrative Unit
AU4AD
Administrative Unit 4 Assembler/Disassembler
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-2
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AUG
Administrative Unit Group

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)
Reduces the power output from the transmitter during normal propagation conditions and
increases the power output to maximum during fading periods to try to maintain the
nominal level of receiver input.
Autonomous Message
A message transmitted from the controlled network element to the Lucent NMS that was
not a response to a command that originated in the Lucent NMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B3ZS
Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution

B8ZS
Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution

BBTR
Backplane Bus Transceiver

BC
Board Controller
BCC
Board Controller Complex

BIN
BINary
BISDN
Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network

Bit Error Ratio (BER)
The ratio of bits received in error to bits sent.

Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP)
A method of error monitoring that uses a specified number of bits (BIP-8)

BLD OUT LG
Build-Out Lightguide
Board Controller Local Area Network (BC-LAN)
The internal local area network that provides communications between the Line
Controller circuit pack and board controllers on the circuit packs that are associated with
a high-speed line.
Branching
Interconnection of independent line systems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-3
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Broadband Communication
Voice, data, and/or video communication at greater than 2 Mbit/s rates.

Broadband Service Transport
STM-1 concatenation transport over the SLM for ATM applications.

BUSTR
BUS Transmitter and Receiver

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAS
Channel Associated Signaling

CC
Cross-Connection, Cross-Connect
CCIR
See ITU-R.
CCITT
See ITU-T.
CCS
Common Channel Signaling

CEPT
Confrence Europenne des Administrations des Postes et des Tlcommunications

Channel
A sub-unit of transmission capacity within a defined higher level of transmission

capacity, e.g. a CEPT-4 (140 Mbit/s) within a 565 Mbit/s fiber system.
CIR
Committed Information Rate

Circuit
A combination of two transmission channels that permits bidirectional transmission of

signals between two points to support a single communication.
CIT
Craft Interface Terminal

Clear Channel (Cl. Ch.)
A provisionable mode for the 34 and 140 Mbit/s tributary outputs that causes parity
violations not to be monitored or corrected before the 34 and 140 Mbit/s outputs are
encoded.
Client
Computer in a computer network that generally offers a user interface to a server. See
also Server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-4
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion

CO
Central Office
Co-resident
A hardware configuration where two Network Management Systems can be

independently active at the same time on the same hardware and software platform
without interfering with each others functioning.
Concatenation
A procedure whereby a multiplicity of Virtual Containers are associated with each other
with the result that their combined capacity can be used as a single container across
which bit-sequence integrity is maintained.
Configuration Management (CM)
Subsystem of the Lucent NMS that, among other things, configures the network and
processes messages from the network.
CONN PCB
Connector Printed Circuit Board

Container (C)
Carries plesiochronous signal, the payload.

CP
Circuit Pack
Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)
Local manager for SDH network elements.

CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check

Cross-Connect Map
Connection map for an SDH network element; contains information about how signals
are connected between high speed time slots and low speed tributaries. See also Squelch
Map.
CTP
Connection Termination Point

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DACScan-T
See Integrated Transport Management Network Manager.

Data Communication Channel (DCC)
The embedded overhead communication channel in the SDH line. The DCC is used for
end-to-end communication and maintenance. It carries alarm, control, and status
information between network elements in an SDH network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-5
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data Communication Equipment (DCE)
Provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminating equipment and
the line. The DCE may be separate equipment or a part of the data terminating
equipment.
Data Terminating Equipment (DTE)
Originates data for transmission and accepts transmitted data.

Database Administrator
A user who administers the database of the Lucent NMS. See also User Privilege.
DC
Direct Current
DCF
Data Communications Function

DCN
Data Communications Network

DCS
Digital Cross-connect System

DDF
Digital Distribution Frame

Dedicated Protection Ring (DP-Ring)
A protection method used in some network elements.

Default Value Provisioning
The original values are preprogrammed at the factory. These values can be overridden
using local or remote provisioning.
Defect
A limited interruption of the ability of an item to perform a required function. The

defect may or may not lead to maintenance action this depends on the results of
additional analysis.
DEG
Degraded signal
Demultiplexing
A process applied to a multiplexed signal to recover signals combined within it and

restore the distinct individual channels of these signals.
Digital Link
A transmission span such as a point-to-point 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, VC12,

VC3 or VC4 link between controlled network elements. The channels within a digital
link are insignificant.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-6
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Digital Section
A transmission span such as an STM-N or 565 Mbit/s signal. A digital section may
contain multiple digital channels.
Directory-Service Network Element (DSNE)
A designated network element that is responsible for administering a database that maps
network element names (node names) to addresses (node Id). There can be one DSNE
per (sub)network.
Disassembly
Splitting up of a signal into its constituents as payload data and overhead (an indication
of the direction of a signal).
Domain
The domain of a Lucent NMS is the set of all SDH network elements that are controlled
by it.
Downstream
At or towards the destination of the considered transmission stream, i.e. in the direction
of transmission.
DPS
Data communication Packet Switch

DRI
Dual-Ring Interworking
DS-n
Digital Signal, Level n

DSL
Digital Subscriber Line

DTMF
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency
Dual Homing
An STM-1/STM-4 ring with AM-1 Plus equipment can be dual homed on a ring
consisting of 1655 AMU or 1663 ADMu. STM-16 rings can also be dual homed with the
1655 AMU.
Dual-Node Interworking
Dual Node Interworking (DNI) is a configuration of two ring networks that share two
common nodes. DNI allows a circuit with one termination in one ring and one
termination in another ring to survive a loss-of-signal failure of the shared node that is
currently carrying service for the circuit.
DUS
Do not Use for Synchronization

DWDM
Dense-Wavelength Division Multiplexing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-7
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EC-n
Electrical Carrier, Level n

ECC
Embedded Control Channel

ECI
Equipment Code Identifier

EDFE
Ethernet Dropped Frames Errors

EH&S
Environmental Health and Safety

EINB
Ethernet Incoming Number of Mbytes

Element Management System (EMS)
See Integrated Transport Management Subnetwork Controller.

EMC
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMI
ElectroMagnetic Interference
EONB
Ethernet Outgoing Number of Mbytes

EOW
Engineering Order Wire

Equivalent Bit Error Ratio (EBER)
The calculated average bit error rate over a data stream.

Errored Second (ES)
A performance monitoring parameter.

ES
End System
ESD
ElectroStatic Discharge
ESPG
Elastic Store & Pointer Generator

ETSI
European Telecommunication Standardisation Institute
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-8
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event
A significant change. Events in controlled network elements include signal failures,

equipment failures, signals exceeding thresholds, and protection switch activity. When an
event occurs in a controlled network element, the controlled network element will
generate an alarm or status message and send it to the Lucent NMS.
Event Management (EM)
Subsystem of the Lucent NMS that processes and logs network event reports.
Externally Timed
An operating condition of a clock in which it is locked to an external reference and uses

time constants that are altered to quickly bring the local oscillators frequency into
approximate agreement with the synchronization reference frequency.
Extra Traffic
Unprotected traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not
used for the protection of service traffic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Far End Block Error (FEBE)
An indication returned to the transmitting node that an errored block has been detected
at the receiving node. A block is a specified grouping of bits.
Far End Receive Failure (FERF)
An indication returned to a transmitting network element that the receiving network

element has detected an incoming section failure.
FAS
Frame Alignment Signal

FAW
Frame Alignment Word

FC
Full contact Connector

FCC
Federal Communications Commission

FDDI
Fiber Distributed Data Interface

FEP
Front End Processor

Free Running
An operating condition of a network element in which its local oscillator is not locked
to any synchronization reference and uses no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-9
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GARP
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol

Gateway Network Element (GNE)
Passes information between other network elements and management systems via a Data
Communications Network.
Gbit/s
Gigabits per second

Geographic Location
Location of the Lucent NMS server. The geographic location is entered as part of the
installation procedure of an NMS.
Geographic Redundancy (GR)
Allows protection of management for a network element by assigning the network

element to two OMSs. The first primary OMS usually manages the Network Element
and is now in the protected domain. If the primary OMS or the link between the network
element and the primary OMS fails, the secondary OMS will automatically take over
management of the network element and is now in the protecting domain. The two
OMSs are connected by a peer to peer link, which they use to pass Geographic
Redundancy management information to each other. This link must be established before
any network element can be protected by Geographic Redundancy.
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure

Global Wait to Restore Time
The time to wait before switching back to the timing reference occurs after a timing link
failure has cleared. This time applies for all timing sources in a system hence the name
global. This can be between 0 and 60 minutes, in increments of one minute.
GNE
Gateway network element - A network element that passes information between other
network elements and operations systems via a data communications network.
GUI
Graphical User Interface

GVRP
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (refer to GARP (p. GL-10))

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HE
Host Exchange
High Density Bipolar 3 code (HDB3)
Line code for e.g. 2 Mbit/s transmission systems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-10
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High level Data Link Control (HDLC)
Protocol in the data-link layer of the OSI reference model.

Higher order Path Adaptation (HPA)
Function that adapts a lower order Virtual Container to a higher order Virtual Container
by processing the Tributary Unit pointer which indicates the phase of the lower order
Virtual Container Path Overhead relative to the higher order Virtual-Container Path
Overhead, and assembling/disassembling the complete higher order Virtual Container.
Higher order Path Connection (HPC)
Function that provides for flexible assignment of higher order Virtual Containers within
an STM-N signal.
Higher order Path Termination (HPT)
Function that terminates a higher order path by generating and adding the appropriate
Virtual-Container Path Overhead to the relevant container at the path source and
removing the Virtual-Container Path Overhead and reading it at the path sink.
HMI
Human Machine Interface

HO
High Order
Holdover
An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an

external reference but uses storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to
the last known frequency comparison with a synchronized reference.
Host Name
Name of the server on which the NMS is running.

HS
High Speed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I/O
Input/Output
ICB
Interconnection Box
ICP
InterConnection Panel
IEC
International Electrotechnical Committee

IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-11
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IFT
InterFace Terminal
Integrated Transport Management Craft Interface Terminal (ITM-CIT)
Local manager for SDH network elements in a subnetwork. Also called the to as Craft
Interface Terminal.
Intermediate System (IS)
A system that routes/relays management information. An SDH network element may be a

combined Intermediate and end system.
IPS
Inter Processor Status

IS
In-Service
IS-IS Routing
The network elements in a management network, route packets (data) between each other
using an IS-IS level protocol. The size of a network that is running IS-IS Level 1 is
limited, and therefore certain mechanisms are employed to facilitate the management of
larger networks. For STATIC ROUTING, it is possible to disable the protocol over the
LAN connections and thereby effectively cause the management network to be
partitioned into separate IS-IS Level 1 areas. In order for the NMS to communicate with
a specific network element in one of these areas, the NMS must identify the Gateway
network element through which this specific network element is connected to the LAN.
All packets to this specific network element are routed directly to the Gateway network
element by the NMS, before being re-routed (if necessary) within the Level 1 area. For
DYNAMIC ROUTING an IS-IS Level 2 routing protocol is used that allows a number of
Level 1 areas to interwork. The network elements that connect an IS-IS area to another
area are set to run the IS-IS Level 2 protocol within the network element and on the
connection to other network elements. Packets can now be routed between IS-IS areas
and the NMS does not have to identify the Gateway network elements.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network

ISO
International Standards Organisation

ITU
International Telecommunications Union

ITU-R
International Telecommunications Union - Radio standardization sector. Formerly known

as CCIR: Comit Consultatif International Radio; International Radio Consultative
Committee.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-12
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunication standardization sector.

Formerly known as CCITT: Comit Consultatif International Tlgraphique &
Tlphonique; International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Jitter
Short term variations of amplitude and frequency components of a digital signal from
their ideal position in time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN
Local Area Network

LBA
Lightwave Booster Amplifier.

LBO
Line Build Out - An optical attenuator that guarantees the proper signal level and shape
at the receiver input.
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCN
Local Communications Network

LDI
Linear Drop/Insert (Add-Drop)

LED
Light Emitting Diode

LEN
Local Exchange Node

LF
Low Frequency
LH
Long Haul
License key
An encrypted code that is required to enable the use of specific modules in the NMS.
Valid license keys can be obtained from your provider.
Line
Transmission line; refers to a transmission medium, together with the associated high
speed equipment, that are required transport information between two consecutive
network elements, one of which originates the line signal and the other terminates the
line signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-13
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Build Out (LBO)
An optical attenuator that guarantees the proper signal level and shape at the receiver
input.
The LPT mode is used to enable or improve network protection schemes on equipment
which is external to TransLAN systems.
LNC
LiNe Controller (SLM)

LO
Low Order
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOM
Loss Of Multiframe
Loop Timing
A timing mode in which the terminal derives its transmit timing from the received line
signal.
LOP
Loss Of Pointer
LOS
Loss Of Signal
Lower order Path Adaptation (LPA)
Function that adapts a PDH signal to a synchronous network by mapping the signal into
or de-mapping the signal out of a synchronous container.
Lower order Path Connection (LPC)
Function that provides for flexible assignment of lower order VCs in a higher order VC.
Lower order Path Termination (LPT)
Function that terminates a lower order path by generating and adding the appropriate VC
POH to the relevant container at the path source and removing the VC POH and reading
it at the path sink.
LPU
Line Port Unit

LRX
Line Receiver
LS
Low Speed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-14
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTA
Line Terminal Application

LTU
Line Termination Unit

LTX
Line Transmitter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAF
Management Application Function

Management Connection
Identifies the type of routing used (STATIC or DYNAMIC). If STATIC is selected,

Management Connection allows the gateway network element to be identified. See also
IS-IS Routing.
Management Information Base (MIB)
The Management Information Base is the database in the node. The MIB contains the
configuration data of the node. A copy of each MIB is available in the EMS and is
called the MIB image. Under normal circumstances, the MIB and MIB image of one
node are synchronized.
Manager
Capable of issuing network management operations and receiving events. The Manager
communicates with the Agent in the controlled network element.
Manufacturer Executable Code (MEC)
Network element system software in binary format that is downloaded to one of the
stores can be executed by the system controller of the network element.
Mapping
Gathering together of payload data with overhead, i.e. packing the PDH signal into a
Virtual Container.
MDI
Miscellaneous Discrete Input

MDO
Miscellaneous Discrete Output

Mediation Device (MD)
Allows for exchange of management information between Operations System and

network elements.
MEF
Maintenance Entity Function (in NE)

MEM
System MEMory unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-15
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Message Communications Function (MCF)
Function that provides facilities for the transport and routing of Telecommunications
Management Network messages to and from the Network Manager.
MF
Mediation Function
MFS
Multi Frame Synchronization signal

MIB image
See Management Information Base.

Midspan Meet
The capability to interface between two lightwave network elements of different vendors.
This applies to high speed optical interfaces.
MLAN
MultiLAN
MMI
Man-Machine Interface Also called Human Machine Interface (HMI)

MO
Managed Object
Motif
X-Windows System supplied by Open Software Foundation.

MS
Multiplexer Section
MSOH
Multiplex Section Overhead. Part of the SOH (Section Overhead). Is accessible only at
line terminals and multiplexers.
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection. Provides capability of switching a signal from a working

to a protection section.
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures

MTBMA
Mean Time Between Maintenance Activities

MTIE
Maximum Time Interval Error

MTPI
Multiplexer Timing Physical Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-16
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair

Multiplexer Section OverHead (MSOH)
Part of the Section Overhead. Is accessible only at line terminals and multiplexers.
Multiplexer Section Protection (MSP)
Provides capability of switching a signal from a working to a protection section.

Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring (MS-SPRING)
A protection method used in multiplex line systems.

Multiplexer Section Termination (MST)
Function that generates the Multiplexer Section Overhead in the transmit direction and
terminates the Multiplexer Section Overhead in the receive direction.
Multiplexer Timing Source (MTS)
Function that provides the timing reference to the relevant component parts of the
multiplex equipment and represents the SDH network element clock.
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path, or by which the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a
multiplex section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE
Network element. The NE is comprised of telecommunication equipment (or groups/parts

of telecommunication equipment) and support equipment that performs network element
functions. A Network Element has one or more standard Q-type interfaces.
NEF
Network element function

NEM
Network element manager

Network Element (NE)
A network element is comprised of telecommunication equipment (or groups/parts of

telecommunication equipment) and support equipment that performs network element
functions. A Network Element has one or more standard Q-type interfaces. A network
element ican be directly managed by a management system. See also Node.
Network Element Equivalent (NEE)
The functionality, database size and processing power that are required from the NMS
are different for each type of network element that is supported. Therefore each type
represents a certain amount of Network Element Equivalent.
Network Mediation Unit (NMU)
Collects fault and alarm events from transmission equipment. The NMS can forward
alarms to the NMU. The NMU can forward alarms to an Operations System.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-17
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Service Access Point (NSAP)
An end system address of the System Controller according to ISO 8348 AD2. The
format is ISO_DCC_LUCENT, which has the following structure:
NMC
Network Maintenance Center

NMS
Network Management System

NNE
Non-SDH network element

NNI
Network Node Interface

Node
A node or network element is defined as all equipment that is controlled by one system
controller.
Node
Defined as all equipment that is controlled by one system controller. A node can not
always be directly managed by a management system. See also network element.
NOMC
Network Operation Maintenance Channel

Non-revertive switching
In non-revertive switching, there is an active and standby high-speed line, circuit pack,
etc. When a protection switch occurs, the standby line, circuit pack, etc., is selected
causing the old standby line, circuit pack, etc., to be used for the new active line, circuit
pack, etc. The original active line, circuit pack, etc., becomes the standby line, circuit
pack, etc. This status remains in effect when the fault clears. Therefore, this protection
scheme is non-revertive in that there is no switch back to the original status in effect
before the fault occurred.
Non-revertive switching
In non-revertive switching there is an active and a standby high speed line, circuit pack,
etc. When a protection switch occurs, the standby line, circuit pack, etc. is selected
which causes the old standby line, circuit pack, etc, to be used for the new active line,
circuit pack, etc. The original active line, circuit pack, etc. becomes the standby line,
circuit pack, etc. This status remains in effect when the faults clears. Therefore, this
protection scheme is non-revertive in that there is no switch back to the original status
that was in effect before the fault occurred.
Non-synchronous
The essential characteristic of timescales or signals such that their significant instants do
not necessarily occur at the same average rate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-18
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Not Protected Domain
The Not Protected Domain for the NMS contains all the network elements that are
managed by that NMS and are not currently protected by another NMS. If the NMS
fails, the network elements in this domain are not managed by any NMS. See also
Geographic Redundancy.
NPI
Null Pointer Indication

NRZ
Non-Return to Zero
NSA
Non-Service Affecting
NTU
Network Termination Unit

NUT
Non pre-emptible Unprotected Traffic

NVM
Non-Volatile Memory
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA
Optical Amplifier
OAM&P
Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning

OC-n
Optical Carrier, Level n

ODF
Optical Distribution Frame

ODU
Optical Demultiplexer Unit

OFS
Out of Frame Second

OI
Optical Interface
OMU
Optical Multiplexer Unit

OOF
Out Of Frame
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-19
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OOS
Out Of Service
Operations System (OS)
The Operations System is the system that provides operations, administration and
maintenance functions.
Operator
A user of the NMS application with Operator privileges. See also User Privilege.
Optical Line System (OLS)
A high-capacity lightwave system that is designed to multiplex eight optical signals with
different wavelengths into one combined signal through an optical fiber. There is a
difference of 1.5 micrometer in wavelength between two multiplexed signals.
OS
Operations System - A central computer-based system that is used to provide operations,

administration and maintenance functions.
OSB
Optical Splice Box

OSI
Open Systems Interconnection

OW
(Engineering) Order Wire

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PABX
Private Automatic Branch eXchange

Paddle Board - Peripheral Control and Timing link (PB-PCT)
A small circuit board used in a 5ESS exchange for protection switching and optical to
electrical conversion of the PCT-link.
Path
A logical connection between one termination point at which a standard format for a
signal at the given rate is assembled and from which the signal is transmitted, and
another termination point at which the received standard frame format for the signal is
disassembled.
Path AIS
Path Alarm Indication Signal - A path-level code that is sent downstream in a digital
network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed.
Path Overhead (POH)
The Virtual-Container Path Overhead provides integrity of communication between the

point of assembly of a Virtual Container and its point of disassembly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-20
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Path Terminating Equipment
Network elements in which the path overhead is terminated.

PC
Personal Computer
PCB
Printed Circuit Board

PCM
Pulse Code Modulation

PCT-link
Peripheral Control and Timing-link

PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

Peer NMS
NMS at the other end of the peer-to-peer link.

Peer to Peer link
Connection between two NMSs with Geographic Redundancy. The link is used to
co-ordinate the management of a network element. See also Geographic Redundancy.
Performance Monitoring (PM)
Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm is generated).
PI
Physical Interface, Plesiochronous Interface

PIR
Peak Information Rate

PJE
Pointer Justification Event

Platform
Family of equipment and software configurations that are designed to support a

particular Application.
Plesiochronous Network
A network that contains multiple subnetworks, each of which is internally synchronous

and operates at the same nominal frequency, but the timing of any of the subnetworks
may be slightly different at any particular instant.
PLL
Phase Lock Loop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-21
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM
Performance Monitoring - Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or

marginally operating systems (before an alarm is generated).
PMA
Performance Monitoring Application

Pointer
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which the Virtual Container is supported.
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service

PP
Pointer Processing
PPC
Pointer Processor and Cross-connect

Primary OMS
NMS that is usually managing a network element. If the primary NMS fails,
management of the network element is passed over to the secondary NMS. A network
element should be provisioned normally on the primary NMS and then be configured for
use on the secondary NMS. See also Geographic Redundancy.
Primary Reference Clock (PRC)
The main timing clock reference in SDH equipment.

Protected Domain
The protected domain for an NMS contains all the network elements for which this
manager is the primary NMS and which are protected by another secondary NMS. See
also Geographic Redundancy.
Protecting Domain
The protecting domain for an NMS contains all the network elements for which this
manager is the secondary NMS. See also Geographic Redundancy.
Protection
Extra capacity (channels, circuit packs) in transmission equipment that is not intended to
be used for service, but rather to serve as backup against equipment failures.
Provisioning
Assigning a value to a system parameter.

PSA
Partially Service Affecting

PSDN
Public Switched Data Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-22
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSF
Power Supply Filter

PSN
Packet-Switched Network
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network

PT
Protected Terminal Power-supply filter and Timing circuit pack

PVID
Port VLAN ID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q-LAN
Thin Ethernet LAN (10BaseT) that connects the manager to gateway network elements
so that management information can be exchanged between network elements and
management systems.
QAF
Q-Adapter Function (in NE)

QOS
Quality Of Service
Quality Level (QL)
The quality of the timing signal(s) that are provided to clock a network element. The
level is provided by the Synchronization Status Marker which can accompany the timing
signal. If the System and Output Timing Quality Level mode is Enabled, and if the
signal selected for the Station-Clock Output has a quality level below the Acceptance
Quality Level, the network element squelches the Station-Clock Output Signal, which
means that no signal is forwarded at all. Possible levels are: - PRC (Primary Reference
Clock) - SSU_T (Synchronization Supply Unit - Transit) - SSU_L (Synchronization
Supply Unit - Local) - SEC (SDH Equipment Clock) - DUS (Do not Use for
Synchronization).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RA
Regenerator Application
Radio Protection Switching system (RPS)
The main function of the RPS is to handle the automatic and manual switching from a
main channel to a common protection channel in an N+1 system.
Radio Relay (RR)
A point-to-point Digital Radio system to transport STM-1 signals via microwaves.

RCU
Rigid Connect Unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-23
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RDDU
RCVR Data Distribution Unit

RDI
Remote Defect Indicator. Previously known as Far End Receive Failure (FERF).
RDI
Ring Drop/Insert (Add-Drop)

RDSV
Running Digital Sum Violations

Receive-direction
The direction towards the cross-connect.

REGEN
Regenerator
Regenerator Loop
Loop in a network element between the Station Clock Output(s) and one or both Station
Clock Inputs, which can be used to dejitterize the selected timing reference in network
applications.
Regenerator Overhead Controller (ROC)
SLM circuit pack that provides user access to the SDH overhead channels at repeater
sites.
Regenerator Section Termination (RST)
Function that generates the Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) in the transmit
direction and terminates the RSOH in the receive direction.
REI
Remote Error Indication. Previously known as Far End Block Error (FEBE). The REI
reflects the number of BIP-8 violations that were detected in the B3 of the incoming
signal on a per frame basis.
Relay Unit (RU)
Radio Relay circuit pack whose main function is to perform protection switching when
the Alignment Switch in the demodulator unit is unable to perform protection switching.
Restore Timer
Counts down the time (in minutes) during which the switch waits to let the worker line
recover before switching back to it. This option can be set to prevent the protection
switch continually switching if a line has a continual transient fault. This field is greyed
out if the mode is non-revertive.
Revertive Switching
In revertive switching, there is a working and protection high speed line, circuit pack,
etc. When a protection switch occurs, the protection line, circuit pack, etc. is selected.
When the fault clears, service reverts back to the original working line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-24
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RF
Radio Frequency
RFI
Remote-Failure Indicator
RGU
ReGenerator Unit
Route
A series of contiguous digital sections.

RPS
Ring Protection Switching

RSOH
Regenerator-Section OverHead; part of the SOH.

RZ
Return to Zero
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
Service Affecting Synchronous Adapter

SAI
Station Alarm Interface

SC
Square coupled Connector

SD
Signal Degrade
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. Definition of the degree of control of the various clocks
in a digital network over other clocks.
SDH-TE
SDH - Terminal Equipment

SEC
SDH Equipment Clock

Secondary NMS
Backup NMS for a network element should the primary NMS fail. A network element
should be provisioned normally on the primary NMS and then be configured for use on
the secondary NMS. See also Geographic Redundancy.
Section
A transport entity in the transmission media layer that provides integrity of information
transfer across a section layer network connection by means of a termination function at
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-25
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the section layer.

Section Adaptation (SA)
Function that processes the AU-pointer to indicate the phase of the VC-3/4 POH relative
to the STM-N SOH and assembles/disassembles the complete STM-N frame.
Section Overhead (SOH)
Capacity added to either an AU-4 or to an assembly of AU-3s to create an STM-1.

Always contains STM-1 framing and can contain maintenance and operational functions.
SOH can be subdivided into MSOH (multiplex section overhead) and RSOH (regenerator
section overhead).
SEF
Support Entity Function (in NE)

Self-healing
A networks ability to automatically recover from the failure of one or more of its
components.
Server
Computer in a computer network that performs dedicated main tasks that require
generally sufficient performance. See also Client.
Service
The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is providing
service. This designation will change with each switch action.
Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS)

Severely Errored Second (SES)
A second that has a binary error ratio. SES is used as a performance monitoring
parameter.
Severity
See Alarm Severity

SFP
Small Form-Factor Pluggable Optics

SH
Short Haul
SI
Synchronous Interface
SIB
Subrack Interface Box

SLC
Subscriber Loop Carrier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-26
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SLM
Signal Label Mismatch

Smart Communication Channel (SCC)
An HDLC messaging channel between the SDH-TE and the 5ESS host node. Similar to
the DCC messaging channels that are located in the STM-N section overhead.
SML
Service Management Level

SMN
SDH Management Network

SMS
SDH Management Subnetwork

SNC/I
SubNetwork Connection (protection) / Inherent monitoring

SNC/NI
SubNetwork Connection / Non Intrusive monitoring

SNR
Signal to Noise Ratio

Soft Windows
PC emulator package for HP platforms.

SOH
Section Overhead. Capacity added to either an AU-4 or to an assembly of AU-3s to

create an STM-1. Always contains STM-1 framing and can contain maintenance and
operational functions. SOH can be subdivided in MSOH (Multiplex Section OverHead)
and RSOH (Regenerator Section OverHead).
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network

Space Diversity (SD)
Reception of the Radio signal via mirror effects on Earth.

SPB2M
Subrack Protection for 2 Mbit/s Board

Specification and Design Language (SDL)
This is a standard formal language for specifying (essentially) finite state machines.
SPI
SDH Physical Interface Synchronous-Plesiochronous Interface

Squelch Map
Traffic map for SLM Add-Drop Multiplexer network elements that contains information
for each cross-connection in the ring and indicates the source and destination network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-27
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
elements for the low-speed circuit to which the cross-connection belongs. This
information is used to prevent traffic misconnection in rings that have isolated network
elements or segments. See also Cross-Connect Map.
SSM
Synchronization Status Marker

Standby
The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is not providing
service, but standby. This designation changes with each switch action.
Standby
The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is not providing
service but is on standby. This designation will change with each switch action.
Station Clock Input (SCI)
An external clock may be connected to a Station Clock Input.

Station Clock Output (SCO)
A clock signal that can be used for other systems.

STM
Synchronous Transport Module Building block of SDH.

STM
Synchronous Transport Module building block of SDH

STP
Spanning Tree Protocol

Stretched Ring (STRING)
An open ring in which each node is an Add-Drop Multiplexer. The end nodes operate
with one equipped high-speed line.
STS
Synchronous Transport Signal; used in SONET.

STVRP
Spanning Tree with VPN Registration Protocol

Subnetwork
A group of interconnected/interrelated network elements. The most common connotation

is an SDH network in which the network elements have Data Communications Channels
(DCC) connectivity.
Supervisor
A user of the OMS application with Supervisor privileges. See also User Privilege.
Supervisory Unit (SU)
Radio Relay circuit pack that gives comprehensive supervision and control facilities to
the user by collecting information from the Alarm Collection Units and Alarm Adapter
Units.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-28
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SVCE
Service
Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)
A circuit pack that recovers and reshapes the clock signal in order to filter out jitter.
Local (SSU_L) and Transit (SSU_T) types are available.
Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time-scales or signals such that their corresponding

significant instants occur at precisely the same average rate.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
A hierarchical set of digital transport structures that is standardized for the transport of
suitably adapted payloads over transmission networks.
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
Function that converts performance data and implementation-specific hardware alarms

into object-oriented messages for transmission over the DCC and/or the Q-interface. The
SEMF also converts object-oriented messages that are related to other management
functions so that they can pass across the S reference points.
Synchronous Line Multiplexer (SLM)
A line multiplexer that is designed to multiplex VC-4 and STM-1 tributary port signals
into STM-16 line port signals.
Synchronous Network
The synchronization of synchronous transmission systems with synchronous payloads to

a master Network clock that can be traced to a single reference clock.
Synchronous Transport Module (STM)
The information structure that is used to support (section layer) connections in SDH.
System Administrator
A user of the computer system on which the NMS application can be installed. See also
User Privilege.
System Controller (CTL)
ISM circuit pack that controls the configuration of an Intelligent Synchronous

Multiplexer system.
System Controller (SC)
A circuit pack that controls and provisions all units. It also contains the data
communication packet switch functionality that is necessary for routing of management
information between network elements and their management system.
System Controller (STC)
SLM Add-Drop Multiplexer network element circuit pack that provides the highest level
of system control for the Synchronous Line Multiplexer system. The STC circuit pack
provides overall administrative control of the system. The STC memory is provided by
the MEM circuit pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-29
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System Controller (SYSCTL)
OLS circuit pack that provides the highest level of system control for the Optical Line
System. The SYSCTL circuit pack provides overall administrative control of the system.
The SYSCTL memory is provided by the SYSMEM circuit pack.
System Memory Unit (MEM)
SLM Add-Drop Multiplexer network element circuit pack that provides the highest level
of system control for the Synchronous Line Multiplexer system. The MEM circuit pack
provides memory support for the System Controller (STC) circuit pack.
System Memory Unit (SYSMEM)
OLS circuit pack that provides the highest level of system control for the Optical Line
System. The SYSMEM circuit pack provides memory support for the SYSCTL circuit
pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCA
Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TDEV
Timing DEViation
TDM
Timing Division Multiplexing

Template
A collection of parameters that define a specific network element configuration. A

template gives the user the opportunity to configure parameters in a network element
with a single operation. The template is re-usable and allow the user to configure the
parameters in many Network Elements in the same way. A set of default templates is
provided, and the user can create new templates and edit or delete user-created ones.
Note that a template is always associated with one specific network element type and
can not be used for other network element types.
TERM
Terminal Multiplexer
TGU
Timing Generator Unit

TI
Timing Interface
TLM
TeLeMetry Unit
TLP
Terminal with Line Protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-30
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network

TPU-PCT
Tributary Port Unit - Peripheral Control and Timing link

TPU155
Tributary port Unit 155 Mbit/s

TPU2
Tributary port Unit 2 Mbit/s

Transmit-direction
The direction outwards from the cross-connect.

Trellis Code Modulation
A combined coding and modulation scheme for improving the reliability of a digital
transmission system without increasing the transmitted power or the required bandwidth.
TRF
TRansFer unit
Tributary
A signal of a specific rate (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, VC12, VC3, VC4, STM-1
or STM-4) that may be added to or dropped from a line signal.
Tributary Overhead Controller (TOC)
SLM circuit pack that allows access to the overhead bytes of the incoming tributary
signal.
Tributary Overhead Controller (TOHCTL)
OLS circuit pack that allows access to the overhead bytes of the Supervisory channel.
Tributary Unit (TU)
An information structure that provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and
the higher path layer. Consists of a VC-n plus a tributary unit pointer TU PTR.
Tributary Unit Pointer (TU PTR)
Indicates the phase alignment of the VC with respect to the TU in which it resides. The
pointer position is fixed with respect to the TU frame.
TSA
Time Slot Assignment

TSI
Time Slot Interchange

TTP
Trail Termination Point

TUG
Tributary Unit Group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-31
Issue 1 March 2009
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UAS
UnAvailable Seconds
ULDT
Ultra Long Distance Transmission

Unavailable Seconds

Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
Allows connected computer equipment to gracefully shutdown and therefore prevents

damage in the case of a power failure. Also absorbs dips in the power supply.
Universal Co-ordinated Time (UTC)
An indication of the time of an event that is independent of the time-zone in which the
event occurred. The local time can be calculated from the Universal Co-ordinated Time.
Upgrade
An upgrade is the addition of new capabilities (feature). An upgrade requires new

software and may require new hardware.
UPL
User Panel
Upstream
At or towards the source of the considered transmission stream, i.e. in the direction that
is opposite to the direction of transmission.
User Privilege
A permission granted to a user to perform actions on the computer system on which the
OMS application runs. User privileges are granted for the System Administrator,
Supervisor or Operator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value
A number, text string, or other menu selection that is associated with a parameter.
VCAT
Virtual Concatenation
VF
Voice Frequency
Virtual Container (VC)
Container with a path overhead.

VLAN
Virtual LAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
GL-32
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VPN
Virtual Private Network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait to Restore Time (WRT)
The time to wait before switching back after a failure has cleared in a revertive
protection scheme. This time can be between 0 and 15 minutes, in increments of one
minute.
WAN
Wide Area Network

Wander
Long term variations of amplitude frequency components (below 10 Hz) of a digital

signal from their ideal position in time. Wander can result in buffer problems at a
receiver.
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing

What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG)
Information as displayed on the screen will appear in the same way on printed output.
Wideband Communications
Voice, data, and/or video communication at digital rates from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s.
Windows
Graphical User Interface on PC systems.

Working
Label attached to a physical entity. Inthe case of revertive switching the working line or
unit is the entity that carry service under normal operation. In the case of non-revertive
switching this label has no particular meaning.
WS
WorkStation
WSF
Work Station Facility

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X-Terminal
Workstation that can support an X-Windows interface

XMTR
Transmitter
XSU
XMTR Switch Unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
GL-33
Issue 1 March 2009
Index
A AC/DC converter, 3-7, 3-8
digital diagnostics monitoring
Add/Drop, A-1
application
Ethernet over SDH
DDM, 3-20
EoS, 3-13, 3-17
Digital Subscriber Line
dual ring closure, 4-8
Ethernet performance
monitoring, 2-81
DSL, 1-3, 3-5
dual-homed ring, 4-7
document conventions, xvii
.............................................................
folded ring, 4-5
documentation
F features and benefits, 3-1
GSM, 4-14
numbers, xviii
FIT, 5-10, 5-10, 5-10, 5-12
IP Tunneling, 4-13
set; manuals, xviii
flexible bandwidth assignment,

2-45
linear, 4-4
DS-3, 2-64
linear extension, 4-7, 4-7
DS1, 2-64, 2-64, 4-2, 4-6, 5-10
ring, 4-6
DS3, 2-64, 4-2, 4-6, 5-10

.............................................................
AU Pointer, A-8
E E1, 2-64, 2-64, 4-2, 4-7
E3, 2-64, 2-64, 4-2, 4-6, 5-10
C CIC
ED
circuit packs
fit rates, 5-8
conventions, xvii
course
GFP, 3-13, 3-17, 3-17

GFP encapsulation
E2, 2-65
.............................................................
Customer Information
Center, 7-1
.............................................................
G Generic Framing Procedure
applications, 1-3
auto-negotiation, 3-14, 3-14
front view, 2-8
VC12Xv, 3-18
VC3Xv, 3-18
GFP/EoS, 2-50, 2-50
Engineering Drawing, 7-1

engineering orderwire
EOW, 3-6
engineering service, 6-3
EOP4_E132 option card, 2-44
.............................................................
I
IMF
infant mortality factor, 5-7
IMR
infant mortality rate, 5-7
registration, 6-8
EOP4_E132_75 option card,

2-44
installation service, 6-1
suitcase, arranging, 6-8
equipment, 3-19
interface
suitcasing, 6-8
ESW4_E14
cross-connections, 3-9
.............................................................
option cards, 2-32

Ethernet interface, 3-5
Ethernet, 3-5
F, 2-71
ISDN, 2-63
D DCC channel, 4-13

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
IN-1
Issue 1 March 2009
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interface
LAN, 2-64, 2-64, 2-64
interface
Q-LAN, 2-71, 4-13
supervision, 2-71
MDO, 2-71, 4-3, 4-3
.............................................................
Miscellaneous Discrete Input
Q quality and reliability, 5-2
MDI, 3-6
Miscellaneous Discrete Output
MDO, 3-6
transmission, 3-3
MSP Protection, 1-3, 1-3, 1-3
tributary, 2-63
MSP protection, 4-4
inventory, 3-19
ITM-CIT, 2-71, 4-3, 4-6
ITU-T, A-1
MTBF, 5-10, 5-10, 5-10, 5-12

mean time between failures,
5-7
Multiplex Section Protection
.............................................................
L LAPS encapsulation, 3-17
LCAS, 3-15
Line Termination Unit
LTU, 1-3, 3-5
Link Access Procedure SDH
LAPS, 3-17
Link Access Procedure SDH
(LAPS), 3-13
Link Capacity Adjustment
Scheme
LCAS, 2-45, 3-13
Link Capacity Adjustment
Scheme (LCAS), 3-15
MSP, 3-10
LWS
Alcatel-Lucent worldwide
services, 6-3
.............................................................
M MAC, 2-50
N Network Termination Unit
NTU, 1-3, 3-5

.............................................................
O OMS, 3-24, 4-6, 4-13
operations interfaces
F interfaces, 3-6
2 Mbit/s/1.5 Mbit/s
tributary, 3-23
reliability, 5-8
and service availability, 5-8
product, 5-2
specifications, 5-8
RoHS Directive, 5-6
S SDH, A-1
section overhead, A-7

Single-pair High-speed DSL
SHDSL, 3-5
Small Formfactor Pluggable
SFP, 3-3
Q interfaces, 3-6
SNC/N Protection, 1-3, 1-3, 1-3
user-settable miscellaneous
discrete, 3-6
Software Release Description,

xix
option cards, 2-24
SOH, 2-65
.............................................................
SRD, xix
P path overhead, A-7
standards compliance, 3-1
performance monitoring, 2-74,

2-74
Ethernet, 2-75
PI-E3DS3/3_E14 option card,
2-42
maintenance service, 6-5

maintenance tier
POH, 2-65, 2-66, 2-66, 2-67
first, 3-24
power supply, 2-67, 2-67, 4-3
second, 3-24
product
MDI, 2-71, 4-3
R re-timing
.............................................................
Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy (PDH), A-1
mapping, 2-50, 2-64
.............................................................
.............................................................
Link Pass Through (LPT), 3-16

LPT, 3-16
quality policy, 5-2
development, 5-3
product description, 2-1
STM-1 frame, A-3

STM-1 tributary, 4-6, 4-8
Subnetwork Connection
Protection (SNCP), 3-10
synchronization, 3-22, 4-2
configurations, 3-22
status message support, 3-22
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH), A-1
Synchronous Transport Module
1 (STM-1), A-3
system overview, 1-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
Issue 1 March 2009
IN-2
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
T T3, 2-3
technical specifications, 2-51

timing, 3-22
training, 6-8
TransLAN, 5-10
transmission interface, 3-3
transmission protection, 3-10
TSS
Technical Support Service,
6-7
.............................................................
X X.21, 4-6
X4IP, 2-50, 5-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
365-312-847R6.0
IN-3
Issue 1 March 2009

365 312 847R6 0 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

365 312 847R6 0 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

See notice on first page.

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal

See notice on first page.

The order number of this document is 365-312-847R6.0 (Issue 1).

About this document

Reason for revision

How to use this information product

Structure of safety statements

Software Release Description

Hardware overview of the 1655 AMU

Street cabinet versions

PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

EPL4_E14 option card

EPL4_E132 (120) and EPL4_E132_75 (75) option cards

EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards

Advanced TransLAN Features

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)

Ethernet mapping schemes

Equipment inventory and reports

Digital Diagnostics Monitoring (DDM) of SFPs

Timing interface features

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

Remote maintenance, management, and control

Alarm severity assignment profile

Planning Network Applications

Planning network application options

Folded ring application

Dual-homed ring application

Linear extension application

Dual ring closure

Multiple ring application

Full capacity ring interconnection

IP Tunneling in the DCC channels application

Multi-service application with the TransLAN option board

1655 AMU typical 1m/1o application

Quality and reliability

Alcatel-Lucents commitment to quality and reliability

SDH signal hierarchy

SDH path and line sections

SDH digital multiplexing

SDH multiplexing process

SDH demultiplexing process

SDH transport rates

About this document

Quality and reliability

Reason for revision

About this document

The following features have been

One shelf variant with two main and

One main unit with pluggable line

Double width adapter card support for

63 x E1 with RJ45 connectors (120

1 + 1 MSP protection on STM-1/4

DCC for Network Element

Supports cross-connection between

MSP Performance Monitoring only

Local and remote software

Supports centralized alarm

Supports remote alarm investigation

Cross-connect loopbacks for electrical

2 Mbit/s external synchronization

Space efficient design for rack